IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 / 
 
 o 
 
 .w> 
 
 Si' WP 
 
 
 Wr 
 
 M/ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 1.0 fM IIIIIM 
 
 I.I 
 
 1.25 
 
 |r 140 
 
 12.0 
 
 1.8 
 
 \A. ill 1.6 
 
 (^ 
 
 ""y.* 
 
 /a 
 
 >^M. 
 
 e. 
 
 '^W 
 
 v: 
 
 
 ^^^ / 
 
 V'i^ .^ 
 
 / 
 
 V 
 
 °m 
 
 M 
 
 fv 
 
 5V 
 
 <^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 Cv 
 
 V 
 
 
 # 
 
 
 <i? 
 
 % 
 
 /i^ 
 
 VV^ 
 
CiHM/ICMH 
 
 Microfiche 
 
 Series. 
 
 CmM/ICMH 
 CoiSection de 
 microfiches. 
 
 Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions Institut canadien de microreproductions historiques 
 
 1980 
 
Technical Notes / Notes techniques 
 
 The Institute has attempted to obtain the best 
 original copy available for filming. Physical 
 features of this copy which may alter any of the 
 images in the reproduction are checked below. 
 
 L'Institut a microfifm:6 le meilleur exemplaire 
 qu'il lui a 6x6 possible de se procurer. Certains 
 d6fauts susceptibles de nuire d la qualitd de la 
 reproduction sort notds ci-dessous. 
 
 □ 
 
 Coloured covers/ 
 Couvertures de couleur 
 
 D 
 
 Coloured pages/ 
 Pages de couleur 
 
 □ 
 □ 
 □ 
 
 Coloured maps/ 
 
 Cartes g6ographiques en couleur 
 
 Pages discoloured, stuined or foxed/ 
 Pages d4color6es, tachet^es ou piqu^es 
 
 Tight binding (may cause shadows or 
 distortion along interior margin)/ 
 Reliure serr6 (peut causer de I'ombre ou 
 de la distortion le long de la marge 
 int^rieure) 
 
 □ 
 
 • 
 
 n 
 
 Coloured plates/ 
 Planches en couleur 
 
 Show through/ 
 Transparence 
 
 Pages damaged/ 
 Pages endommag^es 
 
 D 
 
 Additional comments/ 
 Commentaires suppl^mentaires 
 
 Bibliographic Notes / Notes bibliographiques 
 
 D 
 D 
 D 
 D 
 D 
 
 Only edition available/ 
 Seule Edition disponible 
 
 Bound with other material/ 
 Re\\6 avec d'autres documents 
 
 Cover title missing/ 
 
 Le titre de couveiture manque 
 
 Plates missing/ 
 
 Des planches manquent 
 
 Additional comments/ 
 Commentaires suppldmentaires 
 
 
 Pagination incorrect/ 
 Erreurs de pagination 
 
 Pages missing/ 
 
 Des pages manquent 
 
 Maps missing/ 
 
 Des cartes g^ographiques manquent 
 
)ire 
 tains 
 de la 
 
 The images appe&ring here are the best quality 
 possible considering the condition and legibility 
 of the original copy and in keeping with the 
 filming contract specifications. 
 
 The lant recorded frome on each microfiche shall 
 contain the symbol -~^' (meaning CONTINUED"), 
 or the symbol V (meaning "END"), whichever 
 applies. 
 
 Les images suivantes ont 6X6 reproduites avec le 
 plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et 
 de la nettetd de i'exemplaire filmd, et en 
 conformity avec les conditions du contrat de 
 filmage. 
 
 Un des symboles suivants apparaitra sur la der- 
 nidre image de cheque microfiche, seion le cas: 
 le symoole — ♦■ aignifie "A SUIVRE", le symbcle 
 Vsignifie 'FIN". 
 
 The original copy was borrowed from, and 
 filmed with, the kind consent of the following 
 institution: 
 
 National Library of Canada 
 
 L'exemplaire filmd fut reproduit grdce A la 
 g6ndrosit6 de I'^tablissement prdtuur 
 suivant : 
 
 Bib!iothdqi>e nationale du Canada 
 
 Maps or plates too large to be entirely included 
 in one exposure are filmed beginning in the 
 upper Inft hand corner, left to right and top to 
 bottom, as many frames as required. The 
 following diagrams illustrate the method: 
 
 Les cartes ou leb planches trop grandes pour dtr«i 
 reproduites en un seul cliche sont film^es 6 
 partir de Tangle sup6rieure gauche, de gauche d 
 droite et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre 
 d'images ndcessaire. Le diagramme suivant 
 illustre la m^thode : 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 nt 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
r 
 
■ITT 
 
 I 
 
 APPLIED MECHANICS. 
 
 
 'i 
 
 BY 
 
 HENRY T. BOVEY, M.A., 
 
 ASS. Mem. Inst. C.E. ; Mem. Inst. Mech. E. ; Mem. Am. In.st. M.E. 
 
 Professor of Civil En.ineerinr, and Applied Mechanics, MrGill University, Montreal. 
 tMomoj Queens' Colkye, Camhridye, (Eng.). 
 
 
 MONTREAL: 
 
 PRLNTED BY JOHxN LOVELL & SON. 
 1882. 
 
6^ /-?^ 
 
 207 a 
 
 /3^ 
 
 I 
 
 :; 
 
 ' , ^. ^A. in thp vear One Thousand Eight 
 
 .• »trv Aot of Parliament of Canada, m tne year v»i.c 
 Knterkd according to Act of rariia , . c„;„ j„ tho Office of the Minister of 
 
 Hundn.d and Eighty-two. by John Lovkll & Son, m 
 
 Agriculture. 
 
 \ 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 r of 
 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 FRAMES. 
 
 PAfJE 
 
 Definitions , 
 
 Frame of two Members ^^ 
 
 Frame of three or more Members 2 
 
 Method of Sections < 
 
 ^'■^"^s !ll!V.''"l*l°!!'l ib. 
 
 Bridge and Roof Trusses g 
 
 Compound Roofs 25 
 
 Gothic Roof Truss Ig 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 BOOFS. 
 
 Types of Truss I g 
 
 Principals, Purlins, etc 19 
 
 Roof Weights 21 
 
 Wind Pressure 22 
 
 Methods of Determining the Total Stresses in Roof Members 24 
 
 Tables 32 
 
 Examples ^ i 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 BRIDGES. 
 
 Classification 42 
 
 Depth of Truss ' j^^ 
 
 Position of Platform i^ 
 
 Number of Main Girders 44 
 
 Bridge Loads 4- 
 
 Chord and Web Stresses 4,; 
 
 Friction Rollers ^^ 
 
 i 
 
IV 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Trellis Girder 
 
 Warren Girder 
 
 Howe Tru.MS 
 
 Pratt TruHH 
 
 Fink TrusH 
 
 Bollinan Truss • 
 
 Quadrangular and Post Systems 
 
 Bowstring Girder 
 
 Bowstring Girder with Isosceles Bracing ^^ 
 
 Lenticular Truss ' 
 
 70 
 
 PAOB 
 
 47 
 49 
 55 
 59 
 CI 
 62 
 63 
 ib. 
 
 ber. 
 
 <jani 
 Tests . 
 Tables 
 
 72 
 73 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 SUSPENSION HRIDGES. 
 
 Cables. 
 
 Anchorage ; Saddles 
 
 Suspenders 
 
 Curve of Cable ; Vertical Suspenders 
 
 Pressure upon Piers 
 
 Length of Cable 
 
 Weight of Cable 
 
 Deflection of Cable 
 
 Curve of Cable ; Inclined Suspenders 
 
 Suspension Bridge Loads 
 
 Modifications of Suspension Bridge 
 
 Auxiliary, or Stitlening, Truss ^'^ 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 75 
 76 
 
 77 
 78 
 79 
 
 80 
 81 
 
 82 
 83 
 84 
 85 
 
 ARCHED RIBS. 
 
 Linear Arches 
 
 Arclied Ribs • • 
 
 Bending Moment at any point of an Arched Rib. 
 
 Rib with Hinged Ends ; Invariable Span 
 
 Value ofH 
 
 Process of Designing a Rib 
 
 Rib with Ends absolutely fixed 
 
 Deflection of an Arched Rib 
 
 Elementary Deformation of an Arched Rib. ... 
 
 General Equations 
 
 Rib of Uniform Stiff"nes8 ■ 
 
 Parabolic Rib of Uniform Depth and Stiffness . . 
 Parabolic Rib of Uniform Stiffness 
 
 91 
 
 92 
 
 94 
 
 95 
 
 96 
 
 97 
 
 ib. 
 
 100 
 
 101 
 
 103 
 
 105 
 
 106 
 
 112 
 
 
91 
 
 92 
 
 94 
 
 9y 
 
 96 
 
 97 
 
 ib. 
 
 100 
 
 101 
 
 103 
 
 105 
 
 106 
 
 112 
 
 r 
 
 CONTENTS. V 
 
 Maximum Deflection of an Arched Kib hq 
 
 Arched Kib of Uniform Stiffness connected at the Crown witli a IlorV- 
 
 zontal Distributing Girder jig 
 
 Semi-circular Timber Rib ' ib 
 
 Stresses in Spandril Posts and Diagonals 119 
 
 Maxwell's Method of obtaining the Resultant Thrusts at th'e'suuporis of 
 
 a Framed Arch " 22O 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 bbi'AILS OF rONSTRUCTION. 
 
 Main Chords ^.o 
 
 Platform ,24. 
 
 !*'»« ....!.!!.........*.....!..... 125 
 
 Bending Action upon a Pin '/_ 127 
 
 General 'iemarks ] _ _ j 28 
 
 Kjvets ...*....!..!.......... 129 
 
 Dimensions of Rivets " j.^q 
 
 Strength of Punched and Drilled Plates '.. .','.'.'.'.",'.'.*.*.".'. ib. 
 
 Riveted Joints joi* 
 
 Strength of Riveted Joints '...*."'..'.',,.. 132 
 
 Single Riveted Lap and Single Cover Joints 135 
 
 Single Riveted Double Cover Joints V.'. V.'.V. ".'.'.". '.V. ib. 
 
 Chain Riveted Joints.. ' * ib 
 
 'Ig-zag and other Riveted Joints ...'.'.'...... 136 
 
 Covers r^7 
 
 Rivet connexion between Flanges and Web .."...'"...*. 138 
 
 Examples .oa 
 
APPLIED MECHANICS. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 Frames. 
 
 (1). Dcfantions. — Frames are rigid structures composed of straight 
 struts and ties, jointed together by means of bolts, straps, mortises and 
 tenons, &c. Struts are members in compression, ties members in tension, 
 and the term brace is applied to either. 
 
 The external forces upon a frame are the loads and the reactions 
 at the points of support, from which may be found the resultant forces 
 at the joints. The lines of action of these resultants intersect the joints 
 at or near the centre in points called the centres of resistance. The 
 figure formed by joining the centres of resistance in order is usually a 
 polygon, and is designated the line of resistance of the ' <^me. 
 
 The position of the centres should on no account be allowed to 
 vary. It is assumed, and is practically true, that the joint.^ of a frame 
 are flexible, and that the frame under a given load does not sensibly 
 change in form. Thus, an individual member is merely stretched or 
 compressed in the direction of its length, i.e , along its line of resistance, 
 while the frame as a whole may be subjected to a bending action. The 
 term truss is often applied to a frame supporting a weight. 
 (2) Frame of tioo mcnbers. 
 
 OA, OB are two bars jointed at and supported at the ends A, B. 
 The frame in Fig. 1 consists of two ties, in Fig. 3 of two struts, and in 
 Fig. 2 of a strut and a tie. 
 
 Let P be the resultant force at the joint, and let it act in the direc- 
 tion OC. Take OC equal to P in magnitude, and draw CD parallel 
 to OB ; OD is the stress along OA, and CD is that along OB. 
 
FUNICULAU POLYGON. 
 
 Let the an,i,'b AOB= a, and *-he an<?lc COf>=fi. 
 
 Let iS',, St, be the stresses along OA, OB, respectively. 
 
 ■'• P~ 00 ~ nina *" /' ~ 0'0~ siiui 
 (3.) Franie of three or more inemhers. 
 
 Let .'li^j^'lj ... be a polyf:;oiial franie jointed ut vl,, .ij, J3... 
 
 Let ]\, 1\ 1\ ... be the resultant furce.s at the joints J,, A^, A3 ... 
 
 respectively. Lit >S'„ jS'j, »S', be the forces alon<f Jjvl^, ^l^ A^^ ... 
 
 respectively. 
 
 Consider the joint A,. 
 
 The lines of action of three forces, i', , »S', and Pg, int^^-rscct in this joint, 
 and the forces, beinjr in equi'.ibrium, may be represented in direction and 
 magnitude by the sides of the triangle Os^s^, in which .s, Sg is parallel to 
 i* , Os^ to >S'i, and Os^ to S^. 
 
 Similarly, F^, <S'i, jS'j, may be represented by the sides of the triangle 
 OsiS^ which has one side Os^ common to the triangle Os^s^, and so 
 on. 
 
 Thus, every joint furnishes a triangle having a side common to each 
 of the two adjacent triangles, and all the triangles together i'orm a closfd 
 polygon s, SjjSj... The sides of this polygon represent in magnitude and 
 direction the resultant forces at the joints, and the radii from the 
 pole to the angles s,V3 ••• represent in magnitude, direction and 
 character, the forces along the several sides of the frame AiA^A^ ... 
 The polygon SjSjSj ... is the line of resistance of the f"ame, and is 
 called the funiculaT polygon of the forces /*,, P., 1\, ... with respect 
 to the pole 0. 
 
FUNICULAR POLYGON. 
 
 I to each 
 
 la closxi 
 
 ide and 
 
 lorn the 
 
 kon and 
 
 tUAi ... 
 
 and is 
 
 respect 
 
 Corollary 1. — The converse of the preceding is evidently true. 
 For if a system of forces is in equilibrium, the polygon of forces s, ^.^st^... 
 must close, and therefore the polygon which has its .sides respectively 
 parallel to the radii from a pole to the angles .s,,»a,8.,, ... and which 
 has its angles upon the lines of action of the forces, must also close. 
 
 Corollary 2. — Let the resultant forces at the joints be parallel. 
 
 The polygon of forces becomes the straight line s,Sj, which is often 
 lermed the line of loads.. Thus, the forces 1\, P^, ...1\ are represented 
 by the sides s, s^, s, Sj, ... s^ Sj, which are in one straight line closed by 
 s, Sg and Sj Sg, representing the remaining forces /^, and F^ 
 
 Draw OH perpendicular to s,S5, the line of loads ; OH represents 
 in magnitude and direction the stress which is the same for each 
 member of the frame. 
 
 Let oi, aj, 03... be the inclinations of the members yl, A^, A^ ^3,.. , 
 respectively, to the line of loads, 
 
 . • . 0H= Hsi. tan oi and also, 011= Hsi. tan oj 
 .'. OE. (cot a + cot n) = Hs, + Hs^-s s. = P + P, + P + P = P. -h P. 
 
 Pi+ ..^ P, i\+^, A • ,\. 4. 
 
 . nn — -= — r~ i — - ^"a is the stress common to 
 
 . . ua _ ^^i ^^ ^ ^y^ ,^^ cot a, + coi a^ 
 
 each member. 
 
 OFT 
 
 Again, the stress in any member, e.g., At A^, is Os, = -: — - 
 
 Corollary 3. — Let the resultant forces at the joints ^,, A^, be in- 
 clined to the common direction of the remaining forces, and act in the 
 
METHOD OF SECTIONS. 
 
 directioiiS shewn by the dotted lines (Fig. 4'). Let P\, P r, be the 
 magnitudes of the new forces ; draw Sj .s'g parallel to the direction of P, 
 so as to meet Os,-, in s'f„ (Fig- 5) ; join s^ .s'e- i^'^nce theie is equili- 
 brium, s'fi Sr, must be parallel to the line of action of P',,. 
 
 Thus .s, s'e Sr, is the force polygon. 
 
 Corollary 4. — The forces, or loads, Pj, P3...P;,, 
 are generally vertical, while P„ Pq, are the vertical 
 reactions of two supports. In this case, s^ and II 
 coincide, and II is the horizontal stress common 
 to each member of the frame. 
 
 The stress in any bar may be found as in Corol- 
 lary 2. 
 
 Corollary 5. — If the number of the forces P„ 
 P^, ... is increased indefinitely, and the distance be- 
 tween the Hues of action of the forces indefinitely 
 diminished, the funicular polygon becomes a curve 
 and is called t\iQ fvnicular curve. 
 
 Corollary 6. — If more than two members meet at a joint, or if the 
 joint is subjected to more than one load, the resulting force diafrram 
 will be a quadrilateral, pentagon, hexagon ... according as the number of 
 members is .S 4, 5 ... or the number of loads is 2, 3. 4... 
 
 (4) Method of Sections. It often happens tliat the stresses in the 
 members of a frame may be easily obtained by the method of section?. 
 This method is precisely similar to that employed in discussing the 
 equilibrium of beams, and depends upon the following principle : — 
 
 If a frame is divided by a plane section into tico 2>arts, and if each 
 part is considered separately, ,.ne stresses in the hars (or memhers') 
 intersected by the secant plane must balance the external forces upon 
 the part in question. 
 
 Hence, the algebraic sums of the horizontal components, of the vertical 
 components, and of the moments of the forces with respect to any point, 
 are severally zero, i.e., analytically, 
 
 S(X)=o, I,(V)=o, and M=0 
 
 These equations are solvable if they do not involve more than three 
 unknown quantities, i.e., if the secant plane does not cut more than 
 three members, the corresponding stresses are determinate. 
 
 (5) Jib-Crane. Fig. 7 is a skeleton diagram of an ordinary jib- 
 crane. 
 
 OA is the post fixed in the ground at 0. 
 
CRANES. 
 
 OB is the jib, AB is the tie. 
 
 The jib, tie aud gearing are sus- 
 pended from the top of the post by a 
 cross head, which admits of a free ro- 
 tation round the axis of the post. 
 
 Let the crane raise a weight W. 
 
 Three forces in equilibrium meet 
 at B, viz., W, the tension T in the 
 tie, and the thrust C along the jib. 
 They may be represented by the sides 
 of the triangle AOB to which they 
 are respectively parallel. 
 
 .*. T = W. i^andC= W 12 
 AO AG 
 
 The stress S in the chain tends to produce a compressive stress of 
 equal magnitude in any member along which it passes. Thus, if it 
 pass along AB the resultant stress in thj tie is T-S, while if it pass 
 along BO, the resultant stress in the jib is C + S. 
 
 W 
 
 Also, neglecting friction, S= — , n being the number of falls of chain 
 
 from B. 
 
 Again, the post is a semi-girder fixed at one end and acted upon at 
 
 the other by a force T. 
 
 Let Mj. be the bending moment at any point E of the post distant x 
 from A. 
 
 M^ =T.CosBAD.x=W. 
 
 AB 
 
 ^^\.x^wM.x 
 
 AG' AB AO 
 
 The bending moment at is evidently W.AD, and is independent 
 of the height of the pf^at. 
 
 The vertical component of T, viz., T. — 
 
 W. — , is transmitted 
 AO' 
 
 through the post. Hence, the total unit-stress in the layers of the 
 
 transverse section at E, distant v from the axis, is — ^ ■^~ ± -7 -'"'' 
 
 ' ^ 'A AO J 
 
 A being the area of the section, and / its moment of inertia with 
 
 respect to the axis. The total resultant pressure along the post at 
 
 rp • T, An^n ' onn- w BD , .jr BO BD + AO 
 = — T. sm BAD + C. sm BOF = — ^- -tt{-\- ^V. -_- — - — : 
 
 AU AU MU 
 
 w 
 
 If the post revolves about its axis, the jib and gearing aie bolted to 
 i, and the whole turns on a pivot at the toe G, In this case the frame, 
 
G 
 
 CUANES. 
 
 as a whole, is kept '"n equilibiiuin by the weifiht M\ the horizontal re- 
 action //of the curb-plate at 0, and the reaction /£ at G. The first 
 two forces meet in /', and therefore the reaction at G must also pass 
 throuirh F. 
 
 Hence, since OFG is a trianjjjle of forces, 
 
 //= W. ^, and R = Tr. ^. 
 
 OG GG 
 
 (CO Derrick- 
 Grave. Fij^. 8, 
 shews a combination 
 of a derrick and 
 crane called a der- 
 rick-crane. It is 
 distiniiuished from 
 the jib-crane, by 
 having two bac/i- 
 sf,(ii/K, which are 
 u-iUiilly situated in planes at ritiht-aiigles to each other. One end of 
 the jib is hinged at or near the foot of the post, and the other is held by 
 a chain, which passes over pulleys to a winch on the post, so that the jib 
 may be raised or lowered, as recjuired. 
 
 The derrick-crane is gevierally of wood, is simple in construction, is 
 easily erected, has a vertical as well as a lateral motion, and a range 
 
 ccjual to a circle of from 10 to G(» ft. in radius. It is, therefore, very 
 
 useful for temporary works, setting masonry, &c. 
 The stresses in the jib and 
 
 tie are obtained as in ^(5), 
 
 and those in the back-stays 
 
 and post may be calculated 
 
 as follows : — 
 
 Let Orr OK, OL. be the 
 
 horizontal traces of the tie 
 
 and back-stays. 
 In //O produced, take ON^ 
 
 to represent the horizontal 
 
 component of the stress in 
 
 the tie, i.^ ., T, sin f/,« being 
 
 the inclin.ition of the tie to 
 
 the vertical. Complete the 
 
 parallelogram X Y. 
 
CRANES. 
 
 very 
 
 OX and 01' are the horizontal components of the stresses in the back- 
 stays. Let the angle NOX = 6. 
 .•. OX = ON. cos d = T. sin a. cos 6, and is a maximum when — 0" 
 
 OY=OX. sin d= T. sin a. sin f), '• " '' t)=9{\o 
 
 Hence, the stress in the back-stay is <rreat<^st, when the ttlane of the 
 back-stay and post coincides with that of the jib and tie. 
 
 Again, let /? be the inclination of the back-stays to the vertical. The 
 vertical components of the back-stiiy .stresses arc T. sin a. cos o. cot ft and 
 T. sin a. sin 0. cot /g, so that the corresponding stress along the post is 
 T. sin (I. cot ft. (cos + sin e), which is a maximum when ^=45". 
 
 (7). Jient Crane. 
 
 Fig. 10. shews a convenient form of crane when much hoad-room is 
 required near the post. The crane is merely a semi-girder, and may be 
 tubular with plate webs if the loads are heavy, or its flanges may bo 
 braced together as in the Fig. for hiads of less than 10 tons. The 
 flanges may be kept at the same distance apart throughout, or the 
 distance may be gradually diminished from the base t<iwards the 
 peak. 
 
 Let the letters in Fig. 10 denote the stresses in the corresponding 
 members. Three forces *S^,, C.^, and W. act through the point (1), so 
 that Si and C^ may be obtained in terms of \V ; three forces *S'|,»S'.„7'„ 
 act through (2), so that >S'a and 7\ ni;iy be obtained in terms of »S'i and 
 therefore of W; four forces >S'j„ f„ /S,, C,, act through (3), and the 
 values of iS",, 6V being known, those of aS'^, T^, may be determined. 
 Proceeding in this way, it is found that of the forces at each succeeding 
 joint, only two are unknown, and the values of these are consequently 
 determinate. 
 
 il 
 
8 
 
 TIMBER TRUSSES. 
 
 The calculations may be checked by the method of moments and by 
 the stress diaj^ram, (Fig, 11). 
 e.(j., let W= 10 tons. 
 Take moments about the point (7). 
 
 .'. Tr. (y7)==10. (x?) or T, = 
 
 3. 25 
 
 1. 25' 
 
 10 = 26 tons. 
 
 No other forces enter into the e(|uation o^ moments, as the portion 
 
 of the crane above a plane intersecting 08 and passing through (7) is 
 
 kept in ecjuilibrium by the weight of 10 tons and the stresses Tj, S^, Ce) 
 
 the moments of S,-, and C^ abou [7) are evidently zero. 
 
 .3. 9 
 Again, from the stress diagram, 7\ = QR-= ,-^- 10 = 26 to>ns. 
 
 (8) Timhcr bridge <nid roof 
 trusses of small span. 
 
 (a). — A single girder is the 
 simplest kind of bridge, but is 
 only suitable for very short spans. 
 When the spans are wider, the 
 centre of the girder may be sup- 
 ported by struts OC, OD, Fig. 12, through which a portion of the weight 
 is transmitted to the abutments. 
 
 Let the weight at be P, and let a be the angle AOC. 
 
 P OJl _^P 1 
 
 2 sin a 
 
 The thrust along OC = „ . -,-^ 
 
 Z At 
 
 The horizontal thrust at = ^. -,4y =-6- ^^^ « 
 
 i At/ ^ 
 
 The horizontal and vertical thrusts upon the masonry at C (or />), 
 
 respectively. 
 
 P P 
 
 are — . co< a, and _ 
 
 2 2 sin a 
 
 If the girder is uniformly loaded, Pis one-half of tho whole load. 
 
 {It). — In Fig. 18 a straining ciU, E F, is introduced, and the girder 
 is supported at two points. 
 
 Let P be the weight at each 
 of the points E and F. 
 
 The thrust in EC (or FD) 
 
 = P- 1,^ and the horizontal thrust 
 At 
 
 in the straining piece = 7'. iiii- 
 "* AC 
 
 If a load is uniformly distributed over AB, it may be assumed that 
 each strut carries one-half of the load upon AF (or BE), and that each 
 abutment carries one-half of the load upon AE (or BF). 
 
i 
 
 TIMBER TuUSSES. 
 
 
 By means of straining cillsj 
 the jjirdcrs may be supported 
 at several points 1, 2, ... and the| 
 weight concentrated at each may 
 be assumed to be one-half of the I 
 load between the two adjacent 
 
 points of support. The calculations for the stresses in the struts, etc... 
 are made precisely as above. 
 
 If the struts are very long they are liable to bend, and countcrbraces 
 AM, iiiV, are added to counteract this tendency. 
 
 (<!). — The triangle is the only geometrical figure of which the form 
 cannot be changed without varying the lengths of the sides. For this 
 reason, all compound trusses for bridges, roofs, etc., are made up of 
 triangular frames. 
 
 Fig. 14 represents the 
 simplest form of roof-truss, 
 the dotted lines being the 
 lines of resistance of the 
 bars. 
 
 AC, BC are rafters of 
 equal length inclined to 
 the horizontal at an angle a, 
 and each carries a uni- 
 formly distributed load 11'. 
 
 The rafters react horizontally upon each other at C, and their feet 
 are kept in position by the tie-beam AB. 
 
 Consider the raftt'r AC 
 
 The resultant of the load upon AC, i.e., W, acts through the middle 
 point D. 
 
 Let it meet the horizontal thrust II oi BC upon AC in F. 
 
 For ccjuilibrium, the resultant thrust at A must also act through F. 
 
 The sides of the triangle AFE, evidently represent the three forces. 
 AE W AE _W 
 2 
 AF .__ lAErrHF'^^^^ 
 
 Hence, H= W. -=,.:,= _ = .^. vat a. 
 
 ' EF 2 JJ" 
 
 AF / 
 
 R^w.-^E'^^w.yl' 
 
 FE' 
 
 '1 + 
 
 1 ^' 
 4 • DE' 
 
 cot* a. 
 
 The thrust R produces a tension // in the tic-beam, and a vertical 
 pressure IV^upon the support. 
 
10 
 
 KING-POSTS. 
 
 Also, if y Is the angle FAE, 
 
 tan a. 
 
 ion y=^^: = 2,211 = 2 
 AE AE 
 
 If the rafters .4^, BC. are 
 iiiu'<jual, }et or,, a.^, be their 
 inclination to AB, respectively. 
 
 }j<!t W^ be the nniforuily 
 distributed load npon A(-, W.^ 
 that itfion BC. 
 
 Let the direction of the nintual thrust 7* at C make an an^le /3 with 
 the vortical so that if CO is drawn per|x>ndicnlar to FC, the angle COB 
 = /3 ; the angle A CF = W—ACO = 00"— 3 — "i 
 
 Draw AM pcrpcndicnlar to the direction of /', and consider the 
 rafter A(\ As before the thrust /j*, at .1. the resultant weight >r, 
 at the middle point D of JC, and the thrust P at C, meet iu the point 
 F. Take luouients about A, 
 
 .*. P AM = ir,. AE 
 
 But AM = AC. sinACM= AC. cnsT^a^ and AE= ^. cos. ax, 
 
 W\ co.<i a , 
 
 •. P = 
 
 "2"' cos (/3-a,j 
 Similarly, by considering the rafter BC, 
 
 W2 co.'i di Wi cn.f at 
 
 2 ■ cos (;8 + rto) 
 
 IF, 
 
 P = 
 
 2 • i,'?» (/3 + a-i - 90) 
 
 Hence, -r-. — ;„ — ^ ~ -^ — ~— tt-- — 
 ' 2 con ()3-rti) 2 cos 
 
 IT, + W2 
 
 rn.*i a 
 
 (/3 + at) 
 
 and 
 
 <an /3 = 
 
 W\. tan cii- tVi. tan ay 
 The horizontal thrust of each rafter = P. sh> $ 
 The vertical thrust upon the support A =-- W^ - P. cos 3 
 
 B =. W, + P. ens $ 
 
 (d). — Kfng-pnsf truss. The 
 simple triangular truss may be 
 modified by introducing a king- 
 post CO, (Fig. IG), which car 
 ries a portion of the weight of 
 the beam AB, and transfers it 
 through the rafters so as to act 
 
 upou the tic in the form of a tensile stress. 
 
d 
 
 KING-POSTS. 
 
 11 
 
 *( 
 
 r the 
 
 It >r, 
 
 point 
 
 Let P bo the wvij^lit borne by tlu- kin<,'-po,4 ; represent it ))y (JO. 
 Dr?,w OB parallel to BC and l)E parallel to AB. 
 
 CF I' 1 
 
 DC= . '' ■ = TV — 1 is the thrust in CA due to /*, and is of course 
 
 sm a I sin a, 
 
 equal to DO, i. e., the thrust alonu; CB. 
 
 P 
 
 DE — CE.cot a = .-r . cot n, is the horizontal thrust on each rafter, and 
 
 is also the tension in the tic due to /*. 
 
 Let IF be the uniformly distributed load upon each rafter. 
 
 The total horizontal thrust upon each rafter = ( ir f /*) 
 
 r 
 
 rot a 
 
 IT 
 
 The total vertical pressure upon each support = ^'+-:7 
 
 If the ape.x; (J is not vertically 
 over the centre of the tie-beam, 
 (Fi<c. 17), take CO, as before, to 
 ri'present the weijzht P borne by 
 the kintr-post ; draw OD parallel 
 to BO, and DI'J parallel to AB. 
 
 The weiulit J* produces a 
 thrust CD along CA, DO along CB, and a horizontal thrust DE upon 
 each raftt'r 
 
 CE is the portion of /' supported at ^1 and EO that supported at B. 
 
 DE, and therefore the tension in the tie AB, diminishes with AO, 
 being zero when AC is vertical. 
 
 Sometimes it is expedient to 
 support the centre of the tie- 
 beam upon a coluniii or wall (Fig. 
 18), the king-post being a pillar 
 against which the heads of the 
 rafters rest. 
 
 Consider the rafter ^4^'. 
 
 The normal reaction A" of CO 
 upon AC, the resultant weight 
 irat the middle point D, and the 
 thrust Rat A meet in the point /'. 
 
 Take moments about A, 
 
 • •• li . AC—W.AE, or R = _. cos a 
 
 Thus the total thrust transmitted through CO to the support at ia 
 
 , W ITT 
 
 2. — cos a, cos a = W. cosi a 
 
 w 
 
12 
 
 KING-POSTS. 
 
 The horizontal thrust upon each rafter = —. cos a. sin a = ^ 
 
 (<•). — If the raflers arc incon- 
 veniently lontr, or if they are in 
 (lunger of bending and breaking 
 across, the centres may be sup- 
 ported by struts 0/), OE, (Fig. 
 19). A portion of the weight 
 upon the rafters is transmitted 
 through the struts to the king-post (or rod), which again transmits it 
 through the rafters to act partly as a vertical pressure upon the supports, 
 and partly as a tension on the tie-beam. 
 
 Indeed, the main duty of struts and ties is to transform transverse 
 into longitudinal stresses. 
 
 The load upon the rafters {2.W) may be assumed to be concentrated 
 
 at the points A, D, C, E,and B, in the proportions Jf, il. 1 , i i and 
 
 4 2 2 2 
 
 ) respectively. Drop the vertical DF to represent the load __ at /) ; 
 
 4 ' 2 
 
 draw FG parallel to OZ), and GK parallel to AB. 
 
 GF ( = DG) is the thrust along DO, and may be resolved at into 
 its vertical (= DA") and horizontal ( = GK) components ; the latter is 
 counteracted by an equal horizontal thrust from the strut OE. The 
 
 vertical component DK(—— )is borne by the king-post, so that the 
 
 W 
 
 total pull upon the king-post is — + P, P including the weight of the 
 
 struts and post. 
 
 Take CJ/to represent this pullpZw-s the weight at C, i.e., CM= W+ P. 
 Draw ML parallel to BC, and ZiV parallel to AB. 
 
 CLz= 
 
 W+ P 1 
 
 Sin a 
 
 is the thrust along the rafter from C to D. 
 
 CL + DG = C"^i— 4- -^V ~ — , is the thrust along the rafter from 
 \ 4 2 / sm a ' 
 
 Dto^. 
 
 LNjf GK= P-i^+^\ cot ci, is the tension in the tie. 
 
 Note.— The king-post truss is the simplest and most economical 
 frame for spans of less than 30 ft. In larger spans, two or more sus- 
 penders may be introduced, or the truss otherwise modified. 
 
 ■; 
 
ROOF AND BRIDGE TRUSSES. 
 
 13 
 
 Collar-beams {^OK), queen-posts {DF^ J^O), braces, &c..., (Figs. 
 20, 21), may be employed to pre- 
 vent the defleetion of the rafters, 
 and the complexity of the truss 
 necessarily increases with the 
 span and with the weight to be 
 borne. 
 
 The stresses in the several 
 members are calculated in the 
 manner already described. 
 
 In I?ig. 21, e. g., it may 
 assumed that one-half of the 
 
 weight upon AC=z(lL\, is con- 
 centrated at D, and that the 
 component of this weight per- 
 pendicular to the rafter viz., 
 
 W ... 
 
 Y • cos a, IS distributed be- 
 tween the collar-beam DE and the queen-post DF. 
 
 (9) Trusses for bridges and roofs (}f large span. 
 
 In bridges and roofs 
 of large span the rafters 
 or braces, AC, BC, are 
 very long, and the unsup- 
 ported distance between 
 A and 0, or B and 0, is 
 too great. The rafters 
 are therefore cut off at 
 D and E, (Fig. 22), a 
 straining piece DE is introduced, and tlie tic-btani AB is supported 
 at two points by queen-rods (or posts), DF and Ed. 
 
 Let W be the load upon each of the braces AD, BE, 
 
 Let P be the weight borne by each queen-rod. 
 
 The thrust along DE, the resultsmt weight upon EB, and the resul- 
 tant thrust at B evidently meet in the point A'. 
 
 Take KL to represent W, and draw LM parallel to EK. 
 
 LM is the horizontal thrust in DE, or the tension in Ali, due to W. 
 
 Take EX to represent /■*, and draw iVT' parallel to EB. 
 
 ET is the thrust in ED, or the tension in AB, due to P. 
 
14 ROOF AND BRIDGE TKUSSES. 
 
 Hence, the total thrust in DE, or tension in AB, =:LM+ET 
 = (7w).co,„. 
 
 The values of P and W dopend upon tl»e character of the loadinpj. 
 
 If the load, includint; the wei};ht of the truss, is uniformly distributed 
 over the tie-beam, as in the case of a bridge, it may bo assumed to be 
 concentrated at the points A, F. G and li, in the proportions onr-hol/ 
 of the load upon AF, one-half of tlie luad upon A(i, om-half (tf the load 
 upon BF, and oije-lalf of the load upon Bd', rospeetively. 
 
 Suppose the load to be un- 
 equally distributed, and that 
 a single weight W' is suspend- 
 ed from E. This produces an 
 upwaid pull at D, e(iual in 
 D^.agnitude to the downwa' d 
 pull at E. 
 
 The latter force may be neu- 
 tralized by an equal and opposite 
 force at E, or by a downward 
 
 W' 
 
 pull of at i>, together with 
 
 z 
 
 W' 
 
 an \ipward pull of — at E, 
 
 it 
 
 which is the manner in which 
 the beam AB neutralizes the 
 efiFect of the weight W . 
 
 The beam AB is therefore acted upon by two opposite forces, the one 
 
 at F^ the other at 6?, ejich being equal Xa Z- m. magnitude. 
 
 Let R be the reaction at A ; let AB ■=. I and FG — c. 
 
 . p, W \l^c W' l-e ' W , „ W c 
 
 • • R.l == — -o~ "T^" + — •' — 1-= — — • c, and R — — — . z. 
 
 2. I 2 2 2 2 1 
 
 The magnitude of the bending moment at F and G, at which pointe 
 
 . . . 1 , . . W' c I r 
 
 it 18 evidently a maximum, is . — 
 
 ^ '212 
 
 The ordinates of the dotted lines, Fig. 24, are proportional to the 
 bending moments due to the two equal and opposite forces — FF being 
 the bending moment due to the upward pull at B, and GG' that due to 
 the downward pull at E. 
 
 Again, the rigidity of the truss may be increased by introducing 
 diagonal braces BG and EF, as shewn by the dotted lines in Fig. 22. 
 
 H" l-e 
 
 
 : 
 ■ 
 
COMPOUKD ROOFS, 
 
 15 
 
 El £ 
 
 2 'I 
 points 
 
 The shoaring force for points between /' and (i is ^ mAxinium whf n 
 
 ^r> _ yy. _ II'. ^_^ 
 the load is at /\)r G, itn vahie being ± — c -t- — = -+- y"" ~7~" ^ '^'^ 
 
 force has to be transmitted to the horizontiil b^'ams throufjrh the uitidiuui 
 of a diajj^onal, which is iJli when the load is at /' and KF when the 
 load is at U. Thus, the nnijrnitude of the greati^'st thrust iu either 
 
 of the diai^oiials is, —r ' — r-, 
 
 ^ 2 I (I ' 
 
 s bein^ the K'nirth of a diagonal, and d the depth of the truss. 
 
 (10) (li'iicnil ruu'trks. — In the trasH«.» described in (</) and (t) 
 § (8), and in i^ (1>), th^; vortical members are ties, i.e., are in tension, 
 and the inclined members are struts, /.»■., are in compression, liy 
 invertint^ the respective fiLrures another type of truss is obtained in 
 which the verticals are struts while the inclined members are ties, 
 lioth systems are widely ustd. and the mtiithod of calculatiuj,' the stresses 
 is precisely the same in each. 
 
 In desitniinir any particular member, allowance must be made for 
 every kind of stress to which it nuiy be subjected. The collar-beam 
 J)J'J in ri_u'. -1, for example, must be treated as a pillar subjected to 
 a thrust in the direction of its length at er^ch end ; if it carry tv 
 transverse load, its streiiirthas a beam, support<-Hi at the points DdwdJJ, 
 must also be determined. Similarly, the rafters AC, BC, Fig. m, 
 etc., must be designed to carry transverse loads and to act as pillars. 
 But it must be remembered that struts and queen-posts provide additional 
 points of support over which the rafters are continuous, and it is there- 
 fore practically sufBcient to assume that 
 the rai'ters are divided into a number of 
 short lengths, each of which carries 07ie- 
 /laZ/oi' the load betweeu the two adjacent 
 supports. 
 
 When a tie-beam is so long as to re- 
 quire to be spliced, allowance must be 
 made for the weakening effect of the splice. 
 
 (11) Compound Roofs. — In mansard 
 rov^fs and many other framings a number 
 of rafters are made to abut against each 
 other as in Fig 25. 
 
 The relative position of the rafters is 
 fixed by the condition that the horizontal 
 pressure upon each must be the same, 
 
 ■ ■ ,• 
 
 /_;j;Vll. 
 
 -^K, 
 
 * 
 
 ■■■"-' 
 
 'v> 
 
 .. 
 
 
 Vk 
 ' ^A 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 /I/ 
 
 ^-|f 
 
 
 .^A/ 
 
 
 ^^■^^■S^^E^H 
 
 1 
 
 ■ " •/ 
 
 / 
 
 / 
 
 
 'i , 
 
 — In 
 
 
 riozs 
 
 
16 
 
 GOTHIC ROOF TRUSS. 
 
 in order that the prcflsurc may be completely tranamittod from one 
 rafter to the next. 
 
 Let IK„ ir„ ir, ..., a„ a„ a,... be the wei}?ht3 and inclination.s to 
 the horizontal of the rafters AJi, B,C, CD... respectively. 
 
 Assume that the weights arc concentrr.ted at the points A, B, G 
 
 in the proportions ^, -^-^-^\ ^^^^\ , respectively. 
 
 The triangles BFA, BAG, CGII,... represent the forces at these 
 points. 
 
 Hence the horizontal pressure upon AB = -y- -^j, = -^-cotai = //» 
 
 The resultant thrust along BC= — L_^ — ?. --- = — I- — . -^-- — 
 
 and its horizontal component = ; . — ■. — — = Ha. 
 
 2 sin ia-i - «i) 
 
 Similarly the horizontal component of the thrust along CD 
 W'i + Wi ens a.2 cos a, 
 
 ) 
 
 2 
 
 sill (fla -Ui) 
 
 = //j, and so on. 
 
 But III == Hi == //j . ... 
 
 W Wi + T^ cos tti. cos a-i 
 
 ''2. '"' "' - 2 • sin (a, - a,) 
 
 TT,. 
 
 or —7-" coi a\ = 
 
 Wi -y W, 
 2 
 
 tan a-i — tan Uj 
 
 W^ + W3 COS 052 COS flj 
 
 2 * COS (aa ~ 02) 
 
 _ \V^ +_^,. 1_ 
 
 2 tan 03 — <«'i <h 
 
 Hence, tan a-i == ( 2 + -jp-J.tan a, 
 
 / 2 JF2 TTA 
 <fl?i ai) == ( 2 + — jTT + -rr^ J.tan a\ 
 
 <a« 04 = ( 2 + vp= 1 . fan ai 
 
 &c. &c. 
 If F;= W.,= TF3..., .'. tanai^l-- tan n^=\-tana^ = - tan a,= 
 
 (12) Co^/iic Roof Truss.~T\\\» class of truss exerts an oblique 
 pressure upon the supporting walls, and the framing should be so 
 designed as to reduce the horizontal component of chis pressure to a 
 minimum. 
 
 The primary truss K D E L supports the weights at D, C,and E, 
 (Fig. 26). 
 
 The weight If upon AC, or BC, may be assumed to be concentrated 
 
 . W W W W 
 at the points A, £>, C, E, and B, in the proportions -j-, -^, -^-j "2", 
 
d 
 
 GOTHIC KOOF TKUSS. 
 
 17 
 
 
 w 
 
 and -J-' rcspcctivoly. Hence 
 
 the total weij^ht uj)on the pri- 
 
 uiary truHs == -W. Trace the 
 
 stress (liairraui ; the fine oflomh 
 MN is evidently vertical ; take 
 
 MN » -^ . W i draw OM, ON, 
 parallel to DK, EL, respect- 
 ively. 
 
 The horizontal line Oil is the 
 thrust aldiijj; L)E, and OJ/is the 
 thrust aloni:; DK. 
 
 Draw or parallel to AD; 
 the sides of the trianule OTIl 
 represent the stresses in the 
 members AD, DF, and FA. 
 
 Also, since DF is equal and 
 parallel to AK, T is the middle 
 point of Mil. 
 
 The thrust along ^lA" =^ the 
 thrust along DF + portion of 
 weight concentrated at A 
 
 •trr 
 
 The secondary truss DCE carries a weight -^ at C 
 
 W 
 Take IIS ^= ^ and draw SO' parallel to CD ; SO' II is a triangle 
 
 of forces for one-half of the secondary truss. 
 
 W 
 
 Also, 
 OH - 
 
 Oil . 
 OH 
 
 an 
 
 IIS 
 
 4 2 
 
 : .J — = lu and the resultant thrust aloag DE is 
 
 1 
 
 OH. 
 
 1 
 
CHAPTER II. 
 
 Roofs. 
 
 (1). — Ti/pcs of Truss. — A roof tru.«s may bo constructed of timber, 
 of irctii, or of timber and iron combined. Timber is almo.'it invariably 
 employed for small spans, but in tlie longer spans it has been larirely 
 superseded by iron, in consequence of the couibined liuhtness, strength 
 and durability of the latter. 
 
 Attempts have been made to classify roofs according to the mode of 
 construction, but the variety of form is so great as to render it imprac- 
 ticable t<t make any further distinction than that which may be drawn 
 between those in which the reactions of the supports are vertical and 
 those in which they are inclined. 
 
 Fig. 1 is the simplest form of truss for spans of less than 30-ft. 
 
 Fig. 2 is a superior framing for spans of from iJO U) 4()-ft. ; it may 
 be still further strengthened by the introduct'on of struts, Figs. 3 and 4, 
 and with such modification has been employed to span opi'nings of 90 
 ft. It is safer, however, to limit the use of the type shewn by Fig. 3 to 
 spans of less than 60-fi,. Figs. 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9 are forms of truss suit- 
 able for spans of from 60 to 100-ft. and upwards. 
 
 Arched roofs (Figs. 8 and 9) admit of a great variety of treatment. 
 
PRINCIPALS, PUHLINS, &C. 
 
 19 
 
 ^ 
 
 Thoy have a pieasiiiij^ appoaranco, and cover wide spans witliout inter- 
 mediate supports. The flatness of th<* areh is limited hy the reijuireuunt 
 of a uiininiuni thrust at the abutnu'nts. The tlirust may be resisttid 
 either by tliiekoniiijr the abutments or by intnulueintr a tie. If th(( only 
 load upon a roof-truss were its own weight, an arch in the form of au 
 inverted catenary, with a shallow rib, might be u.sed. But the action of 
 the wind induces oblicjue and transverse stresses, so tliat a considerable 
 depth of rib is generally needed. If the depth exceed 12-ins., it is better 
 to connect tho two flanties by braces than bv a solid web. 
 
 Koofs of wide span are occasionally carried by ordinary lattice girders. 
 
 ( 2) J'riiicijxt/if, J'lir/i'ns, dr. 
 
 treatment. 
 
 The principal rafters in Figs. 1 to 7 are straight, abut against each 
 other at the peak, and are prevented by tie-rods Irom spreading at the 
 lieels. When made of iron, tee (T), rail, and channel (both single > — " 
 and double ][ ) bars, bulb tee (T) and rolled (I) iron beams, are all 
 excellent forms. 
 
 Timber rafters are rectangular in section, and for the sake of 
 economy and appearance, are often made to taper aniformly from heel 
 to ptiak. 
 
 Tlie heel is fitted intti a suitable cast-iron skew-back, or is fixed between 
 wroughtriron angle brackets, (F'igs. 10, 11, 12), and rests either directly 
 upon the wall or upon a wall plate. 
 
 When the span exceeds GO-ft., allowance should be made for alterations 
 
 i 
 
20 
 
 PRIN'CIPALS, PURLINS, &C. 
 
 of leniith due to chariijesof tempcraturo. This may be effoctctl by inter- 
 posing'' a set of rollers between the skew-back and wall-plate at one heel, 
 or by fixing one heel to the wall and allowinj;- the ojjposite skew-back to 
 slide freely over a wall-jiiate. 
 
 The junction at the peak is made by means of a casting or wrought 
 iron plates, (Fig«. 13, 14, 15). 
 
 Light iron and timber beams as well as angle-irons are employed as 
 purlins. They are fixed to the top or sides of the rafters by brackets, 
 or lie between them in cast-iron shoes, (Figs. 1(J to 21), and are usually 
 held in place by rows of tie-rods, spaced at G or 8 ft. intervals between 
 peak and heel, running the whole length of the roof. 
 
 The sheathing boards and final metal or .^late covering is fa.stened upon 
 the purlins. The nature of the covering regulates the spacing of the 
 purlins, and the size of the purlins is governed by the distance between 
 the main rafters, which may vary from 4-ft. t^) ui)wards of 25-ft. Hut 
 when the interval between the rafters is so great as to cause an undue 
 deflection of the purlins, the latter should be trus^ d. Each purlin may 
 be trussed, or a light beam may be placed midway between the main 
 rafters so as to form a supplementary rafter, and trussed as in Fig. 22. 
 
 Struts are made of timber or iron. Timber struts are rectangular in 
 section. Wrought iron struts may consist of L irons, T-bars, or light 
 columns, while cast-iron may be emjtloyed for work of a more orncmental 
 character. The strut-heads :;re attached to the rafters by means of cast 
 caps, wrougbt-iron straps, brackets, &c., (Figs. 23 to 26), and the strut- 
 
 I 
 
or ligbt 
 
 ■ 
 
 ROOF WEIGHTS. 
 
 21 
 
 iVet are easily desigiu'd both for pin and screw connections, (Fius. 27 
 to 30). 
 
 Ties may be of flat or roniid bars attached either by eyes and pins or 
 by !<crtw ends, and occasionally by rivets. (Fiirs. .11. ;-i2). Tlu' greatest 
 care is nectssary in projK'rly pro))ortioninii' the dinunKions ol' the (.yes 
 and ])ins to the stresses that eonie upon them. 
 
 To obtain Lireater security, cacli of the end paiu'lsol'a roof may be 
 provided with lateral ))raees. and wind-ties are often made to run the 
 whole length of the structure through the feet ol'tlie main struts. 
 
 Due allowance must hi' made in all eases for eliaiiu'es of temperature. 
 
 (;{ ) Riiiif )iiliihtx. — In ealeulatini!' the stres.>^es in tlie different mem- 
 bers of a HMif truss two kinds of load have to be dealt with, the one 
 jn'niiiniriif and the other <i<-ct<liiit<il. 
 
 The permanent load consists of the cnrrrlny, the j'nini in y, and arcu- 
 ■))ii(fftfiinis of siiiiir. 
 
 Tabh'S at the end of the chapter sliew the \vei<ilits of various coverings 
 and frauiinirs. 
 
 The weight of freshly fallen snow may vary from 5 to 2()-lbs. per 
 
22 
 
 WIND PRESSURE. 
 
 cubic ft. English and European engineers consider an allowance of 6 
 lbs. per gq. ft. suflScient for snow, but in cold climates, similar to that of 
 North America, it is pr<)bably unsafe to estimate this weight at less than 
 12-lbs. per sq. ft. . 
 
 The accidental or live load upon a roof is the wind pressure, the 
 maximum force of which has been estimated to vary from 40 to 50-lbs. 
 per S(j. ft. of surface perpendicular to the direction of blow. Ordinary 
 gales blow with a force of from 20 to 25-lbs., which may sometimes 
 rise to 84 or 35-lbs., and even to upwards of 50-lbs. during storms of 
 great severity. Pressures much greater than 50-lbs. have been recorded, 
 but they are wholly untrustworthy. Up to the present time, indeed, 
 all wind pressure data are most unreliable, and to this fact may be 
 attributed the frequent wide divergence of opinion as to the necessary 
 wind allowance in any particular case. The groat differences that exist 
 in all recorded wind pressures are primarily due to the unphilosophic, 
 unscientific, and unpractical character of the anemometers which give no 
 correct information either as to pressure or velocity. The inertia of 
 the moving parts, the transformation of velocities into pressures, and 
 the injudicious placing of the anemometer, w'aich renders it subject to 
 local currents, all tend to vitiate the results. 
 
 It would be practically absurd to base calculations upon the vio- 
 lence of a wind-gust, a tornado, or other similar phenomena, as it is 
 almost absolutely certain that a structure would not lie within its range 
 In foct, it may be assumed that a wind pressure of 40 lbs. per sq. ft. 
 upon a surface perpendicular to the direction of bbw is an ample and 
 perfectly safe allowance, especially when it is remembered that a greater 
 pressure than this would cause the overthrow of nearly all the existing 
 towers, chimneys, etc. 
 
 (4) Wind prei^)inre upon inclined surfaces. — The pressure upon an 
 inclined surface may be obtained from the following formula, which was 
 experimentally deduced by Ilutton, viz : 
 
 !.«» .11/1 (I 
 
 P„ = P. ,s//( a 
 
 (A), 
 
 P being the intt'nsity of the wind pressure in lbs. per sq. ft. upon a 
 surface perpendicular to the direction of blow, and 
 
 J\ being the normal intensity upon a surface iuclined at an angle a 
 to the direction of blow. 
 
 Let P,„ P„ be the components of P,„ parallel and perpendicular , 
 respectively, to the direction of blow. 
 
 •*• A == P„. sin a, and P„ == P., cos a. 
 
 
 i 
 
DISTRIBUTION OF LOADS. 
 
 23 
 
 upon a 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 Hence, if the inclined surface is a roof, and if the wind blows hori- 
 zontally, a is the roofs pitch. 
 
 A};ain, let /' be the velocity of a fluid current in ft. per second, and 
 be that due to a head of /t-ft. 
 
 Let w be the weijrht of the fluid in lbs. per cubic ft. 
 
 lictj) be the pressure of the current in lbs. per stj. ft. upon a surface 
 perpendicular to its direction. 
 
 If the fluid, after strikinjr the surface, is free to escape at right 
 angles to its original direction. 
 
 w 
 
 .'. ;j = 2. /(. ?t' = — 
 g 
 Hence, for ordinary atmospheric air, since ir=:.08 lbs., approximately, 
 
 When the wind impinges upon a surface oblique to its direction, the 
 inU'nsity of the pressure is ( -^ — ] , v being the absolute impinging 
 
 velocity, and /s being the angle between the direction of blow and the 
 surface impinged upon. 
 
 Tables prepared from formula; A and B are given at the end of the 
 chapter. 
 
 (5) J)isfn'hii(!(in of Looih. — Engineers have been accustomed to 
 assume that the a^-eidental load is unif(trmly distributed over the wliftle 
 of the rot»f, and that it varies from HO to JlS-lbs. per sq.ft. of covered 
 surface for short spans, and from H.^ to 4(l-lbs. for spans of more than 
 60-ft. But the wind may blow on one side only, and although its direc- 
 tion is usually horizontal, it may occasionally be inclined at a consider- 
 able angle, and be even normal to a roof of high pitch. It is therefore 
 evident that the horizontal component (^j^) of the normal pressure (yj„) 
 should not be neglected, and it may cause a complete nitrsnf of stress in 
 members of the truss, especially if it is of the arched or bracecl type. 
 
 In the following examples it is a.ssumed that the wind blows on one 
 side only, and that the total load is concentrated at the panel jKtints (or 
 points of support) of the principal rafters. 
 
 Let «' be the permanent load per sq. ft. of roof surface. 
 „ j>„ „ normal wind pressure per sq. ft. of roof surface. 
 d „ distance in feet from centre to centre of principals. 
 /, and /jj be the lengths in ft. of two adjacent panels. 
 
 The total ^>iT7««Ht'«Moad at the panel point on the windward side 
 
 9 
 
 
 'sr.W. d. 
 
1' 
 
 24 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 The total accuhuttil load at the panel point on tlio windward side 
 
 ^^ /'- 
 
 <l. 
 
 /, + /. 
 
 The total Inad at the e()rrts})iiii(linL: jtaiu'l point on the leeward wide 
 
 = W. t(. r— 
 
 2 
 
 T(» dt'tcrniine the total .stresses in the various uieud)ors ol' tlu' truss, 
 two methods may be pursued, viz. ; — 
 
 (</). The normal ))ressuri' ( />„) maybe resolved into its vertieal (/>,) 
 and horizontal (/'/,) eomponeiits ; j>,. may be eombined with the perman- 
 ent load and />,, dealt with independently ; the respeetive efleets are to be 
 added toiictiier. 
 
 (I)). The )»ernianent and aceidental loads may be treated separately, 
 and the respeetive effi'ets added toiiether. 
 
 It' / is the Uiii:th (d'a ratter, and it' A" is tlie reaction at the windward 
 sup|iort (hie to the horizontal jiressure of the wind, by takinu' moments 
 about tile leeward sujiport, 
 
 h .1 . /. i'ii>y II • y*„. .s/// (I. I. il . — =<>,orA = — /'„ — 7-' '. 
 
 Hence. A'' is inifnttrr and acts downwards ; it must be le.ss than the 
 reaction at the same su]>port due to the ju'ruuinent load and the vertieal 
 wiiul pressure, or the root' will blow over. 
 
 AV. 1. — Method ((/) aj»plietl to the roof tru.ss repre.sented in Fiir. 38- 
 
EXAMPLES. 
 
 25 
 
 (1 side 
 
 itoly, 
 
 Fi<^. 34 is the stress iliap:ram for the vertical load upon the roof. 
 
 /> (j is the vertical reaction at H = -^- (>"«• '"«" + 2. cO- 
 yz', />/•, /•«. yw, ifjjrcscnt tlu! stresses in the nienihers to \vhi<'li they are 
 respectively parallel, viz., the rafter J /A and the ties HI), /)A. l>h\ 
 
 Fi<;. 3,1 is the stress diai-rani for the load due to the liorizontal com- 
 ponent oi'tlu^ wind jiressure when there are no rollers under the heel ol' 
 either of the rafters. 
 
 The horizonta! reaction at each heel may be assumed to be one-half 
 of the total horizontal force of the wind, and e(jual tt) -■ "' ' .sin a. 
 
 , , . , , , . ,, }},, I. (I sill'' a 
 
 J) q IS the dowmimrd reaction at Ji= — . 
 
 4 ro.s ii 
 
 The stres.se8 in the ineud)ers AB, BD, DA, I)E, arc represented by 
 the lines q'r',j//, r's\ y/.s'. to which they are respectively parallel, and 
 are evidently reversed in kind. 
 
 Thus the total resultant compression in Ali = (jr - ij'r', 
 
 the total resultant tension in HI) — ^n- p'r', in DA = rs - r's', 
 in IJI'J = i>s-j,'s'. 
 
 Fi^. 30 is the stress diagram for the load due to the horizontal com- 
 ponent of the wind pressure, when rollers are placed at B. 
 
 The total horizontal reaction is now at f, and equal to y)„. h <1. sin <i. 
 
 , , • , , • ,. /'»• ^- </ •'*'"^ " 
 
 I) t \^{\w ilinmiriird W'AC on 7> = — 
 
 4 ''".s' 1 1 
 
 t' y' is the Iidrizniital force of the wind at Ii. 
 
 q' /•'. // /■', /•' s\ p s', are the stresses in AH, HP. DA, Dh\ respec- 
 tively, and the n'sultant stres.seH in the dift'erent members are q r-q' / 
 p i—j> /•', r s-r' s'. and /ts~p' s\ as ))efore. , 
 
 Fig. 37 is tlie stress diagram for the load due to the horizontal com- 
 ponent of the wind pressure, when rollers are placed at <\ 
 
 The total horizontal reaction of the wiiul is now at B, and equal to 
 ^>„. f. (h sin ii. 
 
 The horizontal force of the wind at Bis . shni, so that the re. 
 
 sultant horizontal force at B is ".,-" i^ln >' = t' q'. 
 
 2* t IS the duicnicnfd reaction at B - — r— . 
 
 CUS u 
 
26 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 The resultant stresses are obtained as above. 
 
 The stress in I)E equilibrates the stresses in DA. BD, and also thoso 
 in A\l, EC, so that the stresses in DA, DB arc respectively e(iual to those 
 in EA, EC. 
 
 The dotted lines in the diagrams represent the stresses in the mem- 
 bers .1 C, E (\ E A, to which they are respeetivcly parallel. 
 
 Ex. 2. — Method (</) applied to the roof truss represented in Fij;. 33. 
 
 Fig 89 is the stress diat^rani for the vertical load upon the roof. 
 
 l.d 
 })q is the vertical reaction at i? = -— . (2, jy„. ma a + 3. ?/'). 
 
 qo is the weight at F = --— . (2 />„. '•'>.s " + 2. ?'•)• 
 
 qi\ OS, sr, pr. sf, pf. represent the stresses in the members to wliicli 
 
 they are respectively parallel, viz.. BE. FA, DF, DB. DA, 1)E. 
 
 Fig. 4(» is the stress diagram for the load due to the horizontal component 
 
 of the wind pressure, when no rollers are placed either at B or C. 
 
 p„. I. d .fin- a 
 j>'/)i' is the downward reaction sit B = — ;j^ — cos^' 
 
 pn. I. d 
 m'(j' is the resultant horizontal force at B == . s*'«. a. 
 
 The line througli </' parallel to the rafter BA, passes through ;/, so 
 that there is no stress in BD from the horizontal wind pressure. 
 The strisses in the members BE, FA, DF, DA, DE, are represented 
 
 J 
 
' 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 27 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 by the lines, q'r\ s'n', p's', ,sV, p't', to which they are respectively 
 parallel, and are evidently reversed in kind. 
 
 Thus, the total resultant compression in IiF= </r-q'r', in FA^os - 
 a'li', in 1)F - sr - s'r , the total resultant tension in IW = ju- - o, in 
 IJA - sf - s'f\ in I)F -. pf - p't'. 
 Fijr 41 is the stress diagram for the load due to the horizontal compo- 
 nent of the wind pressure when rollers are placed at /i. 
 
 , , . . . , . ,. p„.l.'/ sin'' a 
 
 It t)t IS the vertical reaction at Ji = - — : — -. 
 
 ' 4 cos a 
 
 m' a' is the resultant horizontal force at li - - " • P»- I- ''• •'"'" f'- 
 
 4 
 
 The total resultant stresses in HF, FA, DF, Dli, DA, I)F, are, 
 
 V ~ '/'■') "•*'■ ~ ■'*'"') ■''■'' ~ •''''■'j /"■ ~ /'''■'» •'"■' - ■"*'''? J'^ ~ y''' respectively. 
 The dotted lines in the diairranis represent the stresses in the ineiubers 
 CG, GA, GE, E(\ FA. to which they are respectively parallel. 
 
 ]t(j', in Fig. 39, is the reaction at C --—.-• (/'„. (''>•">' '< + '^. "")• 
 
 g^'o' ia the weight at G =- -^. I. d. w. 
 Ex. 3. — Metliod {(i) applied to the roof truss represented in Fig. 42. 
 
 Fig. 43 is the stress diagram due to the vertical load upon the roof. 
 pq is tlic vertical reaction at B 
 
 r- P"-''"" " . (3. BIl + All), d + -.(4. BH + 2. AH ). d. 
 

 28 
 
 KXAMPLES. 
 
 qm is the weight ^i F - IliiiSH^^JLl^ . BII --= the wi-i-lit at //-- mn 
 
 Fiir. 41 i« the Htrcss cliaiinim duo to the hnrizoiital e<.»iui»onent of tlie 
 
 wiiul pressure, when rollers are placi'd at li. 
 
 />„• I- 'f •*•'"'' " 
 //</ is the downward reaction at li -- — , — • • 
 
 ■• 4 I'ns (I 
 
 o'q' is the horizontal f'oreo of tlii' wind at /» -- Jjll — '.'. /)/•"'. 
 
 'L 
 
 q'm' ~-- m'ii\ is the horizontal force of the wind at For //. and iscijnal 
 
 to Ji^f'jii!!_ii, nil. 
 
 2 
 
 The total resultant stresses in the menihers BF, FIT. 11 A. DF. I) IT. 
 DB, T)A. Die. are, y/' - '/'/•'. iiix - Ill's', lit - ii't' . sr -■ .s'/-', sf - .s'/', 
 jjt' —j/r', tr — f'r'. pr- />'i''. rcsjuctivdy. 
 E.C. 4. — Mt'tliod i^ii) ap|(li('d to the roof truss represented in Fit:'. 45. 
 
 Fig. 46 is the stress diagram due to the vertical load upon the roof. 
 jiq is the vertical reaction at7i= — -. (10. p„. cos a + 14. n-). 
 qm = mil = no, is the weight at 0, F, or Q, and is e(i[ual to 
 
 — . [j),,. cost! + n-). 
 
 Tf />„. rnn II =- y. tlie ;ioint o coincides with ^). 
 
 To avoid ambiguity it is gem-rally assumed that the stresses in IIO, 
 JIF, are ecjual to those in LQ, LF, respectively. 
 
KXAMI'LES. 
 
 29 
 
 Fi«r. 47 is the stress diaurain duo to tho horizontal couiponoiit of the 
 
 wind pressure, wlieii rollers are placed at ('. 
 
 , „ . , , , . „ />,, /. '/ «///* '/ 
 
 J) I IS tlie downward reaction at xj = , — , . 
 
 4 ra.v II 
 
 /' q' is the resultant horizontal force at B == -. j)„. I. <l. sin it. 
 
 •15. 
 
 I 
 
 
 q' III' == ni' )i' r-z ii' o'. is the horizontal force of the wind at (). /•'. or 
 
 Q, and is e«|ual to —^ — . sin it, 
 
 4 
 
 Ex. G. — Method ((/) applied to the roof truss represented in Fi^. 48, 
 
 Fijr. 41) is the stress diayraui for the vertical load upr^n the mof. 
 pq is the vertical reaction at B == -!,-^. (7. j>„ cos a + 1(». ir), 
 
 gm = 7)1 n = --— . (/>„. ros n + w), is the weight at F or //. 
 o 
 
 Fig. 50 is the stress diagram due to the horizont;il component of the 
 
 wind pressure when rollers are placed at B. 
 
 '£) I IS tlie downward reaction at li =- — - — 
 V q' is the horizontal force of the wind at B == 
 
 cos a 
 
 p„. I. d . 
 
 , sin (I. 
 
 Ex. 7. — Method [h) applied to the roof truss represented in Fig. 51. 
 
 Assuming the direction of the wind to be horizontal, th>' load at any 
 joint of the bowstring roof in Fig. 51 due to wind may be taken to be 
 
30 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 the pressure upon a surface o(jual in area to the portion of the roof 
 
 supporttid by one panel or bay, and inclined at the same anf];le to the 
 
 horizontal as the tanjirent to the curve of the roof at the joint in question. 
 
 Let It be the resultant of the load /*, , 1\, I\, I\, at the joints B, d, c, 
 
 /, and let it make an anj^'le tt with the horizontal. 
 
 Fig. 5li is the stress diagram due to the normal wind pressure, when 
 rollers are placed at C. 
 
 
 The whole of the horizontal reaction (= K. cos f>) is at B, and is 
 represented by mn. 
 
 nt is the vertical reaction at B. 
 
 ts, sr, rq, qp^ represent the loads />,, j9j, ^^3, p^^ respectively. 
 
 «(?', rV §2', p3', are the stresses in Bd, de, c/,/A 
 
 md',me',m/\ma', " '' 51,12,23,30 
 
 <fl', e'2',/3', aV, " " d\,e2,/S,A0 " 
 
 The stress diagrams for the normal wind pressure when rollers are 
 placed at B, and also for the permanent load, may be easily drawn as 
 already indicated. 
 
 (6). — Anali/sis. The results in the preceding examples may be easily 
 verified analytically. 
 
 To determine, for example, the stresses in the members of the truss 
 in Ex. 2 due to the vertical load. 
 
 -^ . (2 jo„ cos a + 3. w). (1) 
 
 Let R be the vertical reaction at B 
 
 W 
 
 weight at F = ~. (2 p„. cos a + 2. to). 
 4 
 
 (2) 
 
 ' C,, C„ C3, be the compressive stresses iu BF, FA, DF, respectively. 
 ' r„ T„ r,, " " tensile " " DB, DA, DE " " 
 
 ' the angle ABD == /3 == the angle DAB ; .-. ADE = a + /3. 
 
EXAMPLES. 
 
 31 
 
 Resolve tlie forces at li porpendicular to the rafter, 
 
 ,' , R, ms a = 7',. sin $. 
 Resolve the forces at li perpendicular to the tie DB, 
 
 .'. Ji. cos « - ^ = (\. sin /8 
 Resolve the forces at F parallel to the rafter, 
 
 , ■ . ^^1 — \y. sin (I = t\ 
 Resolve the forces at F perpendicular to the rafter, 
 
 .-. W. i-osn = (\ 
 Resolve the forces at D perpendicular to the tie DE^ 
 ••• 2\. sin a - )8 + 6',. cos a = T.^. sin « + /8 
 
 = R. "]'^'^ . sin a - )3+ (\. cos <t. by (3) i 
 silt & ^ J V / f 
 
 (3) 
 
 (1) 
 
 (7) 
 
 Resolve the forces at D perpendicular to the tie DA, 
 
 •*• T^. sin 2 i3 — C;,. cos j8 == 'J\. sin ITT^ 
 
 = 2. R. cos a, cos /3 - ^3. cos d. by (3) (8) 
 
 From these equations, C,, C.^, C^, T,, 7'j,, 1\, maybe found in terms 
 ofji„ and u\ 
 
 The value of y, may be verified by considering a section of the roof 
 made by a plane a little on one side of A. 
 
 Let h be the distance of BE from .1 ; take moments about ^4. 
 
 •*• T.^. h = R. h cos a — II'. -. cos a 
 
 „ I sin (I + fi I 
 
 or 7,. -. -— =Jt.Lcos a — IV. -. cos a 
 
 ^ 2 cos /3 2 
 
 . • . jT,. sin (d + P) =: 2. R, cos a. cos /3 - W. cos a. cos j8, which agrees 
 with 8, for C^ = W. cos a by (6) 
 
^1 
 
 32 
 
 TABLES. 
 
 WEIGHTS OF VARIOUS ROOF FRAMINGS. 
 
 Description of Roof. 
 
 Pont 
 
 Coiniiion Tnipsi 
 
 liu 
 
 (lu 
 
 do 
 
 Coiiinion Truss 
 do 
 do 
 ^^—.j. Timber 
 |RSnrnfteri< ami 
 JSg5|»'truts, iron 
 ties. 
 
 Location. 
 
 Cover- 
 ing. 
 
 Ijiverpoo! 
 Docks 
 
 Felt 
 
 Liverpool 
 Docks 
 
 do 
 do 
 do 
 
 Zinc 
 
 Zinc 
 Zinc 
 Slates 
 
 Manchester.. 
 Litne Street.. 
 Birtninghain 
 Strasburg. .. 
 
 Paris 
 
 Dublin 
 
 Derby 
 
 Sydenham.. . 
 
 do 
 St. Pan eras. 
 Cremorne.,.. 
 
 Span. 
 
 lAVelf^UiTi Til's] 
 
 Width i i'<'''«i. n.(,f 
 
 ,)£ I covered .-irea. 
 
 Bays. 7^ 7, 1 
 
 •' il" ram- Cover-! 
 
 Pitch. 
 
 mg. 
 
 4.(1 
 
 WA\"\ 12M)" 
 50^0"j lO^U" ;^.o 
 
 53^3"! 11^0" 2.085 
 
 o4^o"i i4^o"i !).r)i 
 uo^o"i (/.(i" II (ji 
 
 72^0"|2U^()" 7.0' 
 
 ing. 
 
 o.OC 30 
 
 c2^o" 
 
 7(i-'.0" 
 79^0" 
 
 80^8" 
 
 90^2" 
 
 84^0" 
 
 1 00^0" 
 
 130^0" 
 
 50^0" 
 
 154^0" 
 
 211^0" 
 
 97^0" 
 
 153^0" 
 
 4F.0" 
 
 8F.6" 
 
 120^0" 
 
 72^0" 
 
 240^0" 
 
 45^0" 
 
 12^0" 3.01.3; 5. GO 
 
 25^0" 
 13^0" 
 IF. 8" 
 
 20^0" 
 
 9^ 
 14^ 
 
 20 ^ 
 W 
 
 2r/. 
 
 24^ 
 13^ 
 20^ 
 16^ 
 24^ 
 
 29^ 
 I-/, 
 
 30° 
 
 2.01 7.72 .SO" 
 3.80 5.42 30° 
 -^•'2' 12.1 20^34 
 
 13. G 
 
 8.D 
 
 7.0 
 
 0.4 
 
 9.0 
 
 4.9 
 
 ll.O 
 
 12.0 
 
 15.0 
 
 10.7 
 
 16.8 
 
 11.8 
 
 U.3 
 
 24.5 
 
 11.5 
 
TABLES. 
 
 33 
 
 WEIGHTS OF VARIOUS ROOF COVERINGS IN LBS. PER SQ. FT. 
 
 Thatch 6.5 
 
 Flit, a.sphalted 3 to .4 
 
 Tin 7 to 1.25 
 
 Hheet lead 5 to 8 
 
 Sheet zinc 1.25 to 2.(1 
 
 Copper 8 to 1.25 
 
 Sheet iron, (1-16 in. 
 
 thick) 3.i» 
 
 Sheet in)n, (corruijated) 3.4 
 
 Cast-iron plates, (f-in. 
 
 thick) 15.0 
 
 Sheet iron, (16 W.G.), 
 
 and laths 5.0 
 
 iron 
 
 and 
 
 Corruirated 
 
 lath.s 5.5 
 
 Slates, (ordinary) 5 to 9 
 
 Slates, (large) 9 to 11 
 
 Tiles 
 
 Pantiles 
 
 Slates and iron laths 
 
 Boardinir, (.f-in. thick) 
 Boarding and ^heet 
 
 iron, (20 W. G.) 
 
 Timbering of tiled and 
 
 slated roof's, addi- 
 
 7 to 20 
 
 6 to 10 
 
 10.0 
 
 2.5 
 
 6.5 
 
 tional 5.5 to 6.5 
 
 Table of the values of P,,, F,. J\ in lbs. per scj. ft. of surface, when 
 i^=40, as determined by the formula P„ = P.sln ^'S*"'""-! 
 
 Pitch of roof. 
 
 P. 
 
 1\ 
 
 Pn 
 
 5" 
 
 5.0 
 
 4.9 
 
 .4 
 
 10" 
 
 9.7 
 
 9.6 
 
 1.7 
 
 20" 
 
 18.1 
 
 17.0 
 
 6.2 
 
 30" 
 
 26.4 
 
 22.8 
 
 13.2 
 
 40" 
 
 33.3 
 
 25.5 
 
 21.4 
 
 5<l" 
 
 38.1 
 
 24.5 
 
 29.2 
 
 60" 
 
 40.0 
 
 2(1.0 
 
 34.0 
 
 70" 
 
 41.0 
 
 14.0 
 
 38.5 
 
 80" 
 
 40.4 
 
 7.0 
 
 39.8 
 
 90" 
 
 40.0 
 
 0.0 
 
 40.0 
 
 Tabic prepared from the formula, ^j = 
 
 20 
 
 Vt'lDcitic in feet 
 
 Velocities in miles 
 
 Pressure in lbs. per 
 
 per tecond. 
 
 per hour. 
 
 sq. ft. 
 
 10 
 
 6.8 
 
 .25 
 
 20 
 
 13.6 
 
 1.00 
 
 40 
 
 27.2 
 
 4.00 
 
 60 
 
 40.8 
 
 9.00 
 
 70 
 
 47.6 
 
 12.25 
 
 80 
 
 54.4 
 
 16.00 
 
 90 
 
 61.2 
 
 20.25 
 
 100 
 
 68.0 
 
 25.00 
 
 110 
 
 74.8 
 
 30.25 
 
 120 
 
 81.6 
 
 36.00 
 
 130 
 
 88.4 
 
 42.25 
 
 150 
 
 102.0 
 
 56.25 
 
 1'^ 
 
 I 
 
EXAMPLES. 
 
 (1). If the pole of a funicular polygon describe a straight line, shew 
 that the corresponding sides of successive funicular polygons with respect 
 to successive positions of the pole will intersect in a straight line which 
 is parallel to the locus of the pole. 
 
 (2). A system of heavy bars, freely articulated, is suspended from two 
 fixed points ; determine the magnitudes and directions of the stresses at 
 the joints. If the bars are all of equal weight and length, shew that the 
 tangents of the angles which successive bars make with the horizontal 
 are in arithmetic progression. 
 
 (3). If an even number of bars of equal length and weight rest in 
 equilibrium in the form of an arcli, and if a,, (i.i,...a„, be the respective 
 angles of inclination to the horizon of the 1st, 2nd, n"* bars count- 
 ing from the top, shew that tcui a„_^.^ = .tl ■ tan a„. 
 
 2 /i - 1 
 
 (4). Four burs of equal weight and length, freely articulated at the 
 extremities, form a scjuare ABCJJ. The system rests in a vertical plane, 
 the joint A being fixed, and the form of the square is preserved by 
 means of a horizontal string connecting the joints /i and I). If H^be 
 the weight of each bar, shew ((/).-that the stress at C is horizontal and 
 
 =~2~j ('>)-that the stress on BC Sit B is ir.-y and makes with the 
 
 , (r).-that the stress on ^^ at B 
 
 vertical an angle t<in'^ 
 
 18 
 
 Vi '•{ . . 3 
 
 W. — :j- and makes with the vertical an angle ^nr'-s", (rf). -that the 
 
 5 
 
 stressupon jliiat J. is-— .ir, (<?).-that the tension of the string is 2. W 
 
 (5). Five bars of equal length and weight, freely articulated at the 
 extremities, form a regular pentagon ABCDE. The system rests in a 
 vertical plane, the bar CD being fixed in a horizontal position, and the 
 form of the pentagon being preserved by means of a string connecting 
 the joints H and E. If the weight of each bar be IK, shew that the 
 
 W 
 
 tension of the strmg is ——.(jan 54° + 3. tan. 18"), and find the magni- 
 
 tudes and directions of the stresses at the joints. 
 
 (6). Six bars of etjual length and weight (= W), freely articulated at 
 the extremities, form a regular hexagon. 
 
 First, if the system hang in a vertical plane, the bar AB being fixed 
 in a horizontal position, and the form of the hexagon being preserved 
 by means of a string connecting the middle points of AB and J)E, shew 
 
 that, (</).-the tension of the string is 3 If, (6) .-the stress at C is .. 
 
 2.\/3 
 
EXAMPLES. 
 
 35 
 
 and horizontal, (r).-the !,trcP8 at D is ir.V- and niakos with the vertical 
 an angle tan'^ t4'h- 
 
 Secoinl, if the system rest in a vertical plane, the bar DEXw'wv^ fixed 
 in a horizontal position, and the form of the hexairon being preserved by 
 means of a string connecting the joints C and F, shew that, (f^.-the 
 
 t(!nsion of the string is W. va, (i),-the stress at C is W.yJ'-[\&\\A u akes 
 
 with CBan angle *'" v ji^;, (f)--the stress at £ is W.yJ !_ and makes 
 with CD an angle sin-^ ^/^ 
 
 Thinly if the system hang in a vertical plane, tlie joint A being fixed, 
 and the furm of tiie hexagon being preserved by means of strings 
 connecting A with the joints E, JJ, and (7, shew that. (r/).-the tension of 
 each of tlit; strings AE and AC is \V. VJ, (/>).-the tension of the string 
 AD is 2 ir, and determine the magnitudes and directions of the stresses 
 at the joints, assuming that the strings are connected with pins distinct 
 from the bars. 
 
 (7). Shew that the stresses at C and F in the first case of Ex. 6 
 remain horizontal when the bars AF, FE, IU\ CI), are replaced by any 
 others whieh are all ecjually inclined to the horizon. 
 
 (8). An ordinary jib-crane (Kig. 7, Chap. I) is required to lift a 
 weight of lO-tons at a horizontal distance of (i-ft. from the axis of the 
 post. The post is a hollow cast-iron cylinder of 10-ins. external diar. ; 
 find its thickne><s, assuming the safe tensile and compressive stress to be 
 H-tons per scj. in. 
 
 The hanging j)art of the chain is '\\\ four falls ; the jib is 15-ft. long, 
 and the t^ip of the post is lU-ft. above ground ; find the stresses in the 
 jib and tie when the chain passes (l).-along the jib. (2).-along the tie. 
 
 The post turns round a vertical axis ; find the direction and magni- 
 tude of the pressure at the toe, which is 3 ft. below ground. 
 
 (9). If the post in the preceding question were replaced by a solid 
 cylindrical wrought-iron post, what should its diar.be; the safe inch- 
 stress being 3 tons as before ? 
 
 (10). The horizontal traces of the two back-stays of a dvirrick-crane 
 are* and y ft. in length, and the angle between them is a ; shew that 
 
 '•OS. (0-0) X 
 
 being the 
 
 the stress in the post is a maximum when 
 
 "^ cos I) y 
 
 angle between the trace ;r and the plane of the jib and tie. 
 
 ('11). The Fig. represents a crane employed in the construction of the 
 staging for the Holyhead break- water. \t> 
 principal members are two wrought-iron I 
 rods ABC, supported at H upon two timber 
 uprights BD, and connected at A and Cwithj 
 two timber longitudinals ADE. The crane rests upon a truck, and the 
 
36 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 centre of pressure is maiiitainecl at /> by iiieans of ;v movalile balanee- 
 l)ox V)etweeii I) aial A'. 'I'lie crane is recjuired to lift a weight of 2-tons. 
 deteruiine the stresses in the different members. (Data: — AK—M 
 ft.. AI)^'.V,)-{\., D('='l-2-\\., BD^Mt., vertical distance between J 
 
 and/;-7ift0 
 
 Point out a method by which the members may be efiectively braced 
 
 together. 
 
 (12). The inner flantre of a bent crane. (Fig. 10. chap. T), forms a 
 (jnadrant of a circle of 2(>-ft. radius, and is divided into/oKr e(|ual bays. 
 The iHifir flange forms the segment of a circle of 2.")-ft. radius. The 
 two flanges are o-ft. apart at the foot, and are stru(,'k from centres in 
 the same liorizuntal line. The bracing consists of a st'ries of isosceles 
 triangles, of which the bases are the eipial l)ays of the inner flange. The 
 crane is required to lift a weight of lO-tons, determine the stresses in 
 all the members. 
 
 (];}). A braced semi-arch is 10-ft. dei>p at the wall and ]>rojects 40-ft. 
 The upper flange is horizontal, is divided into /'**//• eijual bays and 
 carries a uniformly distributed load of 4n-tons. 'I'he lower flange form-! 
 the segment of a circle of lU4-ft. radius. The bracing consists of a 
 series of isosceles triangles of whica the bases are the e(|ual bays of the 
 upper flang(>. |)etermine the stresses in all the meud).'rs. 
 
 (14). Three bars, freely articulatt'd. form an e(piilati'ral trianglt! 
 AJi(\ Tile system rests in a vertical plane upon suj»port< at /i ami (^ 
 in the same horizontal line, and a weight IT is suspended from .1, 
 determine the stress in Ii(\ neglecting the weight of the bars. 
 
 (15). Three bars, freely articulated, iorm a triangle . I /^<^. and the 
 system is kept in c((uilibrium by three forces acting on the joints, deter- 
 mine the stress in each bar. 
 
 What relation holds between the stresses when the lines of action of 
 the forces meet. ('*).-in the centroid. (A).-in the orthoeentre of the 
 triangle ? 
 
 (16). A triangular truss of white pine consi.-^tsof two c(iual raftiTS ..J li, 
 AC, and a tie-beam B(^ ; the span of the truss is l{l>-ft. and its rise is 
 7^-ft. ; the uniformly distribute I load upm each raft.M* is S4<K)-lbs , and 
 •A weight of 1(1.0(1(1 lbs. is suspenth'd from the centre of the tie-beam ; 
 det^irmine the dimensions of the raiters and tie-beam, assuming the safe 
 tensile and compressive inch stresses to be 3'{0U and 2700-lbs., respec- 
 tively. 
 
 (17). The beam J /? is sup- 
 ported at /i ami strengthened 
 by a tie or strut ( '/) ; a 
 weight ir is suspended from 
 ^1 ; .shew how to determine 
 the dimeusious of the beam 
 and brace. 
 
FA'AMPLES. 
 
 37 
 
 (18). A triangular truss consists of two equal raftors aP, AC, and 
 a tit'-bcam B(\ all of white pine ; the centre I) of the tit'-beam is 
 supported from ^1 by a wrcu^rht-iroii rod A/); tln' uiiifurnily distributed 
 load upon each rafter is 84()()-lbs. and upon the tie-beam is 36,(MM)-lbs ; 
 di'tcrniinc the dimensions of the different members, BC being 40-ft. and 
 A/) 20-ft. 
 
 What will be the effect upon the several members if the centre of the 
 tie-beam be supported upon a wall, and if for ihc rod a post be .substituted 
 against which the lieads of the rafters can rest ? 
 
 (19). A triangular truss of white jiitie consists of a rafter A(\ a 
 vertical post vl/i, and a horizontal tic-beam AC; the load upon the 
 rafttr is 300-lbs. per lineal ft.; J6' == 30-ft., .1/^ == 6-ft. ; find the 
 resultant pressure at (^. 
 
 How nuich .strength will be gained if the centre of the raft r be 
 supported by a strut from /i ? 
 
 (20). The rafterH of a roof are 20-ft. long, and inclined to the vertical 
 at IJO" ; the feet of the rafters are tied by two rods which meet under 
 the vertex and an; tied to it by a rod 5-ft. long ; the ro(d' is loaded with 
 a weight of 35U0-lbs. at the vertex, determine the stres.ses in all the 
 members. 
 
 (21). The feet of the equal roof rafters .1/^, .1^', are tied by rods BI), 
 CI), which meet under the vertex and are joined to it by a rod AD. 
 If li'and W are the distributed loads in lbs. upon the rafters, and if 
 •s is the span of the roof in it., shew that the weight of metal in the ties 
 
 5 ir+ w 
 
 in lbs. is -. -. . s. c(tt /s. / being the safe inch-stress in lbs., and fi 
 
 the angle ABD. 
 
 (22). TheraftersylT?, .ir. in the Fig. are20-ft., 
 long, and are sui)ported at the centres by the struts 
 l)K, l)F ; the centre I) of the tie-beam B(^ is sup- 
 ported by a tie-rod AD, 10-ft. long; the uniformly 
 distributed load upon AB is80()0-lbs.. and ui)on AC\ 
 is 2400-lbs. ; determine tlu' .^tresses in all the members. 
 
 What will be the effect upon the several mend>ers if ^ifl be subjected 
 to a horizontal pres: ure of 156-lbs. per lineal ft. ? 
 
 (23). Determine the dimensions of all the members of the truss in 
 the preceding question, assuming the tie-beam to be also loaded with 
 a weight of 12tM)-lbs. per lineal ft. 
 
 (24). A roof truss consists of two equal rafters inclined at 60° to the 
 vertical, of a horizontal tie-beam of length /, of a collar-beam of length 
 
 n, and of a queen-post at each end of the collar-beam ; the truss is loaded 
 
 with a weight of 2600-lbs. at tlie vertex, a weight of 4000-lbs. at one 
 collar-beam joint, a weight of 1200-lb8. at the other, and a weight of 
 
38 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 13,500-lbs. at the foot of each quci'ii ; doteruiiiie tlic stress in each 
 inoiuber. 
 
 (25). Tho platform of a bridj^o for a cloar span of I 
 60-ft. is carried by two tiuibcr trusses 15-ft. deep, 
 and of the form shewn in the Fij;. ; the load upon the I 
 
 bridge is 5n-lbs. per sq. fi. of platform, which is 12- 1 
 
 ft. wide ; what should be the diuieiisions of tho ditiereut members, 
 assumiiifz; the workiuij; stress to be 4('(l-lbs. per sq. in. ? 
 
 If a single load of tiOdO-lbs. pass over the bridjje, and if its effect be 
 equally divided between the trusses, find the greatest stress produced in 
 the diagonals ^1.1, BB. 
 
 (26). A frame is composed of a horizontal top beam 40-ft. long, 
 two vertical struts 8-ft. long, and three tie-rods of which the middle one 
 is horizontal and 15 ft. long; liiid the greatest stress produced in the 
 several members when a single load of 12.(l0<)-lbs. passes ov.t th e truss. 
 
 (27). The truss represented by the Fig. is conqioscd 
 of two e(|ual ratters, A B.AC fu'.r equal tie-rods A I). 
 BIJ, AE, C/'J, and the horizontal tie DE. 
 
 If ir be the distributed load upon AB, IP that 
 
 upon AC, s the span, $ the angle ABD, and/ the safe ineli-stre.-s in the 
 
 5 \V + W 
 
 metal, shew that the total weight of the tie-rods is —. 
 
 / 
 
 s. cot $. 
 
 GO" - 1 
 
 (28). If the rafters in the preceding Question are inclined to tho 
 horizontal at an angle a, and if the tension on BD or EC is equal 
 to that on DE, shew that /3 =- «, (t. e., D and E must fall in the hori- 
 zontal line BC), or ^ ■ 
 
 Petermine the stress in ^D corresponding to the latter value of/?. 
 
 (29 1. The trusses for a roof of the same type as that in Question 27 
 are 12-ft. centre to centre, the span is 40 ft., the horizontal tie is 16-ft. 
 long, the rafters are inclined at OlC'to the vertical, the deadweight of the 
 roof including snow, is estimated at 10-lbs. per sq. ft. of roof surface, 
 there are no rollers either at B or C ; determine the stress in each mem- 
 ber wlien a wind blows horizontally o.i one side with a force of 40-lbs. 
 per sq. ft. of vertical surface. 
 
 (30). The accompanying truss is similar t(> that 
 in question 27 with the addition of the struts l)F, 
 EG. 
 
 (a). — With the same data as in question 27 shew | 
 
 f> a W+(W^ W). cos 'a 
 
 that the weight of the metal in the tie rods is -• - • . , 
 
 b y • s(« /3- c"s j3 
 
 and is a minimum when tan'' )3 == 2 + 
 
 W 
 
EXAMPLES. 
 
 39 
 
 an 
 
 d is a miuimuui when tan'^fi^ 
 
 (h). If there arc no rollers either at B or at C, and if a wind blows 
 horizontally upon .1 /i, tshew that the horizontal component of it^ pres- 
 sure upon AB produces no stress in the rod Bl). 
 
 (c). In a given roof, the rafters are of pitch-pine, the tie rods of 
 wroughtr-irou, the sjiun is tiO-ft., the trusses are 12-i't. ecntre to centre, 
 DF== 5-ft. == J'JG, tlie anj;le.4/i6' =- 30", the dead vvei-ht of the roof, 
 including snow, is 9-lhs. per sq. ft. of roof surface, rollers are jilaced at 
 C, a single weight of HllOO-lbs. is suspended from /', :ind the rool" is also 
 designed to resist a normal wind pressure of U(i.4 lbs. per sq. it. of roof 
 surface on one side; determine the dimensions of the several members. 
 
 (31). The accompanying truss is similar to that 
 in Question 27 with the addition of the/owr equal 
 struts I)F. nil. AY/, EK. 
 
 (((). — With th(; same data as in question 27 shew | 
 that the weight of the metal in the tie-rods is 
 5_s_ 4 W+'d. (W+ W). cos'^ 
 
 18 /' cos fi. sin fi ' 
 
 7_ 3 W' 
 
 4 ^i"W' 
 
 (6). — In a truss of this type adopted for the roof of a shed at Birk- 
 enhead, the riifteri are of piich pine, are rectangular in section, have a 
 constant breadtli of U|^-ins., and a depth which gradually diminishes from 
 13-ins. at the heel to It^-ins. at the peak ; the struts, of which 1>F and 
 EG are vertical, are also of pitch pine, are rectangular in section, and 
 have a scantlini: of Si-ins. by Gi-ins. ; the tit-rods are of wroui;ht-iron 
 and AD == BJJ -= AE == CE -= 23-ft. ; BD and EC are round 'l}i-\n. 
 bars, AD9.\\i\ AE are round H-in. bars, DE is a round 1^-in. bar; 
 the angle ABC =- 30" ; the span == 7!)-ft. ; the trusses are 13 ft. centre 
 to centre ; the heel B is free to slide on a smooth wall-plate ; the dead 
 weight of the roof, including snow, is 8-lbs. per sq. ft. of roof surface ; 
 determine the stress per unit of area to which each member is subjected 
 when the wind blows horizontally witi a force of 40-lb8. per sq. ft. of 
 verti'.'al surface, (1 — upon the side AB, (2) — upon the side^lf. 
 
 (32). The Fig. represents the form of truss recent- 
 ly ado})ted for the roof of a shed at Liverpool. The 
 rafters are of pitch pine, are rectangular in section, 
 have a depth of 14-ins., a breadth of 8-ins., are I 
 inclined at GO" to the vertical, and are each supported 
 at 5 equidistant points ; the six struts are also of pitch pine and reetau 
 gular in section ; 1)F ViW A EC are each 10-ft. G-ins. long, and liave a 
 scantling of 12-ins. by 8-ins. ; the remaining four struts have a .scant- 
 lings of 8-ins. by 8-ins. ; the tie-rods are of wrough^iron ; BX and 
 CO are round 2§-in. bars, ND and OE are round 2|-in. bars> Dl* 
 and EQ are round Ig-in. bars, FA and QA are round 2;^ in. bars, 
 FN, FF, GQ, and GO are round 1^-in. bars, DE is a round l.f in. 
 bar ; the trusses are 20-11. centre to centre, and the weight of a bay of 
 
40 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 the roof is 24,41 (i-lbf^ ; tho span is 90 ft.4-ins. ; the heel li is free to 
 slide upon a sinonth wail-plat(^ ; dcteniiiiie the stress per unit of area in 
 eaeli uunilur when the wind prodiiees a normal pressure of 2'>.4-lbs. 
 pcrsq. ft. of roof surface, (l)-upon the side .1/^, (2)-upon the side AC. 
 
 (.33). Make an alUsmative desi<rn for the truss in the preceding 
 question, usin^i iron instead of timber for the rafters and struts. 
 
 (34). Tlie trusses for a roof are to be 2r)-ft. centre 
 to centre, and of the tvpe represented l)y the Fijr. ; the i 
 span />V'=- l(l()-ft., tiie an.ule A/U'--:W<\ a sinjrle 
 weijiht of lOOO-lbs. is to be suspended from //. and one I 
 of 2(HM(-lbs. from 0^ rollers are placed at (', the roof is| 
 to be designed to resist a horizontal wind pressure on one side i>f40-lbs. 
 per sq. ft. of vertical surface, the ties are to be of wrouudit-iron. the 
 rafters and struts of timber or wrought-iron ; determine the dimensions 
 of the different members. 
 
 (35). The domiul roof of a ga^ 
 holder ibr a clear span of HO ft. is I 
 strengthened by secondary and primary 
 
 trussing as in the Fig. The points /i\ 
 
 and 6' are connected by the tie /^/V passing beneatli the central strut 
 AP, which is 15 ft. long, and is also common to all the primary trusses; 
 the rise of A above the horizontal is 5 ft. ; the secondarv truss ABEF, 
 consists of the e(|ual bays All, HG, (Hi, the tven BE, Et\ FA, of which 
 BE is horizontal and the struts d'E, FIf, which are each 2 ft. (5 in. 
 long, and are parallel to the radius to the centre of Gil; the secondary 
 truss ACLK'is similar to ABEF; when the holder is empty the weight 
 support^'d by the truss is 3fi,fl00-lb>;., which may be asumed to be con- 
 centrated at G, II, A, JA N, in the proportions.'HOOO, 4(100. 1000, 4000 
 and 8000-lbs., respectively; determine the stresses in the different mem- 
 bers of the tru.ss. 
 
 Should the braces HE and ML be introduced ? Why ? 
 
 (3G). Dcisign the bowstring principals for the following roofs — 
 
 (a). Span ■= 50-ft., rise == 10-ft., depth of truss at centre == 5-ft., 
 distance between principals =r U-ft. 
 
 (/>). Span=n 150-ft., rise =:, 30-ft., depth of truss at centre == 12-ft., 
 distance between principals -= 20-ft. 
 
 (c). Span == 200-ft., rise == 40-ft , depth of truss at centre == 20-ft., 
 distance between principals == 20-ft. 
 
 {<!). Span == 100-ft., rise==25-ft. 
 
 (37). — A funicular polygon is drawn for a series of parallel loads at 
 given distances ; shew that, {<i).-hy properly drawing the closing line of 
 the polygon a bending moment curve is obtained which corresponds to 
 any position of the series of loads on at»y given beam, (i).-so long as 
 the closing line lies on the same two polygon sides, its positions for any 
 given beam form the envelope of a parabola, (c),-the centre of the 
 
i' r 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 41 
 
 i; I 
 
 hoam cnrrcpponflinf: to a jrivon olnsin.tr line bisects the distance between 
 tlie verticals through the intersection of the polygon sitles and the point 
 where the closing line touches the parabola. 
 
 (38). Vertical loads of 4, 3. 7 and 'J-tonc are concentrated upon a hori- 
 zontal beam of2(l-ft. sj.an at distances of .5, 7. 12. and ir)-ft.. respectively, 
 from the left su]>]iort ; prove uenerally that tlie vertical ordinate inter- 
 cepted between a point on the corresponding I'unicular polygon and a dos- 
 ing lino wlio.se hori'/ontal projection is the span of the beam, represents on 
 a certain determined scale the bending moment of a section at the ]ioint ; 
 find its value by scale measurement f(«r a section at !>-it. from the left 
 support, using the following .scales :-for hiKjths, ^-inch^ 1-foot ; \'oy forces, 
 ^-inch == 1-ton ; the jxilar distance == 5 tons. 
 
 Determine grapliieally by means of the same diagram the greatest bend- 
 ing moment that can be ])roduced on the same section by the same series 
 of loads travelling over the span at the stated distances apart. 
 
 (89). The inclined bars of the trapezoidal trus.s repre- 
 sented by the Fig. make angles of 45" with the horizontal ; a 
 load of 10 tons is applied at the top joint of the left rafter in 
 a direction of 45" with the vertical ; draw a frame diagram 
 and determine graphically the two reactions, assuming' the 
 one at the right to be vertical ; aKo, by means of a recipro- 
 cal figure, find the stresses in all the pieces of the frame. 
 
 Ex))lain in what manner the right hand reaction may be made approx- 
 imately vertical. 
 
CHAPTER III. 
 Bridges. 
 
 (1). — CliisHijicatiun. — Bri(lij;i!a may be dividi'd intti tliroe general 
 classes, viz. ; (I). — Bridge.s with horizontal girders, (2). — Suspension 
 bridges, (3). — Arched bridges. 
 
 The present chapter will treat of bridges of the 1st class oidy. In 
 these the platforiu is supported by two or more main girders resting upon 
 two or more supports, and exerting thereon pressures which are vertical 
 or very nearly so. 
 
 The neutral line (or surface) divides the girders into two parts, of 
 which one is stretched and the other compressed. 
 
 (2). — Comparative advuntages of curved and horizontal J(anges. — 
 Jiittle. if any, advantage is gained by varying the depth of a girder, ana 
 the practice is open to many grave objections. The curved or parabolic 
 forui is not well suited to plate construction, and a diminution in depth 
 lessens the resistance of the girder to distortion. Again, if the Vjottom 
 flange is curved, the bracing lor the lower part of the girder is restricted 
 within narrow limits, and the girder itself must be independent, so that 
 in a bridge of several spans any advantage which might be derivable from 
 continuity is necessarily lost. 
 
 The depth is sometimes varied for the sake of appearance, but, gene- 
 rally speaking, the best and most economical form of girder is that in 
 which the depth is uniform througlunit, and in which the necessary 
 thickness of flange at any point is obtained by increasing the number of 
 plates. 
 
 (3). — Depth of girder, or trnas. — The depth may vary from ^'^th to 
 Tjth of the span, and even more, the tendency at present being to approx- 
 imate to the higlier limit. If the depth fall below -j-'ath of the span, 
 the deflection of the girder bec(unes a serious consideration. 
 
 The depth should not be mon; than about Ih times the width of the 
 bridge, and is therefore limited to ^-i-ft. for a single and to 40-ft, for a 
 double track bridge. 
 
 (4). — Position of platform. — The platform may be supported either 
 at the top or bottom flanges, or in some intermediate position. It is 
 
POSITION OF PLATFORM. 
 
 43 
 
 cliiirncd in favour of the last tliat tho main ^jinlers may be braced to- 
 gether below the iilatform ( Fii;. 1), while the upper portions serve a.s 
 parapets or {guards, and also that tiie vibration comumuicated by a 
 passing train is diminished. The position, hoW(!ver, is not conducive to 
 rij^idity, and a large amount of metal is required to form the connections. 
 
 The method of supporting the platform by the top flanges, (Fig. 2), 
 renders the wh(>le depth of the girder available for braeing, and is best 
 adapU'd to girders of shallow depth. Heavy cross girders njay be 
 entirely dispensed with in the case of a single track bridge, and tlie load 
 most effectively distributed, by laying the rails directly upon the flanges 
 and vertically above the neutral line. Provision may be made for side 
 spaces by employing sufliciently long cross-girders, or by means of sliort 
 cantilevers fixed U) the flanges, the advantage of the former arrangement 
 being that it increases the resistance to lateral flexure, and gives the 
 platform more elasticity. 
 
 Figs. 3, 4, 5, shew the cross girders attached to the bottom flanges, 
 and the desirability of this mode of support increases with ths depth of 
 the main girders, of which the centres of gravity should be as low as pos- 
 sible. If the cross-girders are suspended by hangers or bolts below the 
 flanges, (Fig. 5), the depth, and therefore the resistance to flexure, is 
 increased. 
 
 In order to stiffen the main girders, braces and verticals, consisting of 
 angle or tee-iron, are introduced and connected with the cross-girders by 
 gusset-pieces, etc. ; also, for the same purpose, the cros-t-girders may be 
 

 44 
 
 NUMBER OF MAIN GIRDEUR. 
 
 
 prf)lon^'e(l on cacli side and the end jc»iiK'd to the top flanircs by suitable 
 barH. 
 
 When the depth of the main girders is more than about 5-ft., the top 
 flanges should b • braced together. But the minimum clear head-way 
 over the rails is 10-ft., so that some other method slumld be adopted for 
 the support of the platform, when the depth of the main girders is more 
 than 5-ft. and less tlian IG-ft. 
 
 Assunu' that the depth of the platform below th(^ flanges is 2-ft., and 
 that the dejith of the transverse bracing at the top is 1-ft. ; the total 
 flmiti>it/ depths are 7-ft. andl9-ft., and if J is taken as a mean ratio of 
 the depth to the span, the corresponding limiting spans are 5G-ft. and 
 152-ft. 
 
 (5). — Comparative advantagps of two, three and four main girders. 
 — A bridge is generally constructed with two main t^irders, but if it is 
 crossed by a double track a third is occasionally added, and sometimes 
 each track is carried by tiro independent girders. 
 
 The tiro-girder system, however, is to be preferred, as the rails, by 
 such an arrangement, may be continued over the bridge without devia- 
 tion at the approaches, and a large amount of material is economized, even 
 taking into consideration the increased weight of long cross-girders. 
 
 The employment of four indepesident girders possesses the one great 
 advantage of facilitating the maintenance of the bridge, as one-lialf may 
 be closed for repairs withoi,t interrupting the trafiic. On the other liand, 
 the rails at the approaclios umst deviate from the main lines in order to 
 enter the bridge, the 'vidth of the bridge is much increased, and far more 
 material is required in its construction. 
 
nillDGE LOADS. 
 
 45 
 
 Fow, if any, reasons can bo uiLri'tl in favour of tho introduction of 
 ii third intonucdiato j^nrdcr, since it presents all the object ionahle features 
 of the last system without any corresponding ncouunendatinn. 
 
 (0). — Bridge hmds. — In order to deteruiino the stresses in the 
 different members of a bridge truss, or main girder, it is necessary 
 to ascertain the amount and character of the load to wliieh the bridjio 
 may be subjected. The load is partly tlrml^ partly Hn\ and depends 
 upon the type of truss, the span, the number of tracks, and a varii'ty of 
 other conditions. 
 
 The dead load increases with the s| an, and embraces the weight of 
 the main girders (or trusses), cross-girders, platform, rails, ballast, and 
 accumulations of snow. 
 
 A table at the end of the chapter gives the dead load which may be 
 adopted as a first approximation in calculating the strength and 
 designing the parts of a bridge. 
 
 (7). — Lirr load. — The live load due to a passing train is by no 
 means unifnmdy distributed, but consists of a nund>er of diH'erent 
 weights concentrated at definite points. This variable distribution is of 
 little importsnce for spans of more than 100-ft., as the ratio of the dead 
 to the live load then becomes very large, but it is nf vital moment when 
 the span is short. 
 
 The extreme weight of a locomotive upon its three drivers, with a 
 wheel-base rarely exceeding 12-ft., variiis from 72,000 to ^^4,tl0t( lbs., 
 and the maximum weight u]»on one pair of drivers may be taken at 
 :-iO,()00-lbs. 
 
 Thus, 30,000-lbs. may bo concentrated at the centre of spans of 12-ft. 
 and under. This is etpiivalent to (50.(<00-lbs., uniformly distributed, /.*'., 
 to 12,000-lbs. for a 5-11. span, and to 6000-lbs for a 10-ft. sj.an, per 
 lineal ft. 
 
 If the locomotive is placed centrally upon spans of 15, 20, 25, and 
 30-ft.. and if it is assumed that its weight ( == 84,000-lhs.) is equally 
 distributed between the drivers, the bending moments at the centre are, 
 147,000, 252,000, 357,000, and 402,000 ft.-lbs., respectively. The 
 
 g 
 equivalent uniformly distributed loads per lineal ft. are, 147,000 X —^^ 
 
 (==52205-lbs.), 252,000 x _(- 5040-lbs.), 357,000 x A.^(..4569a 
 lbs), and 462,000 X -- ( == 4106§-lbs.) 
 
 iifl 
 
46 
 
 CHORD AND WEC STRESSES. 
 
 Two locomotives at the head of a train will cover a span of GO-ft., and 
 the load is practically uniform, or 2HO0-lbs. per lineal it. 
 
 Two locomotives and tenders will cover a span of lOO-ft., and impose 
 a practically uniform load of 2750 lbs per lineal ft. 
 
 The couplinfjj of more than two locomotives is sometimes necessary 
 upon snow-roads, but rarely occurs els«. where, and the case should not be 
 included in a general rule for bridge design. It is a common practice, 
 however, of the English Board of Trade, to prove a bridge by covering 
 each track with as many locomotives and tenders as possible, and mea- 
 suring the resulting deflection — an unreasonably severe proof for spans 
 of more than lOii-ft. 
 
 The weight of the heaviest train, exclusive of the engine, may be taken 
 at 2250-lbs. per lineal ft. When a train crosses a bridge the conse(jueut 
 strains are far more intense than if the train were at rest, and in France 
 the government ri'gulations require a bridge to be proved under a moving 
 as well as under a dead load. This additional intensity rapidly dimin- 
 ishes as the span increases, and may be disregarded lor spans of more 
 than 75-ft. 
 
 For spans of less than 75-ft. the live load may be reduced to an equi- 
 valent dead load by adding to tlie former certain arbitrary percentages, 
 which may be taken at 10 for 75-i't., 20 for GO ft., 30 for 50-ft., 40 for 
 40ft., 50 for 30-ft., GO for 20-ft., and 70 for 10-ft. 
 
 For spans of more than 75-ft. the total load -- ihad load + lice load. 
 Provisit n may be made against accidents from high winds by the intro- 
 duction of lateral bracing sufficiently strong to withstand a pressure of 
 40-lbs. per sq. ft. of truss and train. 
 
 Tables at the end of the chapter give the uniformly distributed live 
 loads upon railway and highw.iy bridges of diff"erent sjtans. 
 
 (■g), — Chord and web stresses. — It may be assumed that the load upon 
 a bridge is concentrated at the panel points of the main trusses. 
 
 The stresses produced in the chords (flanges) by the passage of 
 a train are to be calculated on the basis of a uniformly distributed load. 
 In determining the strength of the web members allowance may 
 be made for the irregularity in the dist'-ibution of the live load by sub- 
 stituting for the nearest standard panel weight a weight equal in amount 
 to that upon an independent sj)an of the same length as a panel. 
 
 (9). — B'Mviiig, Friction (^also called expansion and hearirg) rollers, 
 (.((•_ — The area of the bearing surface at the supports (abutments) must 
 be sufficient to prevent any undue crushing. The length of the bearing 
 for a cast iron girder is often made one-fifteenth of its central depth. 
 
BKAKING, FRICTION ROLLEUS. 
 
 In order to provide for the lon<i;itadinal contraction and expansion of a 
 girder from changes of temperature, a smooth metallic sliding surface 
 (bed-plate) is placed under one end, and, if the span is more than 60-ft., 
 friction rollers are interposed between the girder and plate. The crush- 
 ing strength of a cylindrical roller is proportional to the product ol' 
 its length and diameter, and that of a sphere to the square of its diameter, 
 while the relative strengths of a cube, the inscribed cylinder upon its base, 
 the inscribed cylinder upon its side, and the inscribed sphere, are 
 as, 100, 80, 32, 26. It is not desirable to subject cast-iron rollers to 
 a greater pressure than that of 4000 to fiOOO-lbs. per lineal inch, r? 
 340-lbs. per sq. in. of diametral section, and in practice, when there ^re 
 several rollers, the working pressure should not exceed 185-lb8. per sq. in. 
 of diametral section, as an iillowance must be made for a variation in 
 the j)Osition of the centre of pressure at the bearing, owing to the 
 impossilnity of loading the rollers equally. 
 
 The elastic strength of the rollers should remain unimpaired, and 
 therefore the bed-plates should be fixed with the utmost care. Imper- 
 fect fixing cannot be remedied by increasing the number of the rollers. 
 
 It is uncertain whether cast-iron bed-plates continue long in working 
 order, and hard-wood wall -plates are often substituted i'orthem in t^pans 
 of even 150-ft. 
 
 Let W be the total weight upon a bridge truss in lbs. 
 
 B " breadth of the bearing at the roller end in inches. 
 L " length " " " " " 
 
 2 X 185 ■ ^ 370* 
 B for moderate spans usually exceeds the width of the flange (chord) 
 by f) or Gin., and maybe still further increased, in the case of large 
 bridges. 
 
 Note. — In the construction of the Yougltioglieny bridge, l*a., the 
 specification requires that the pressure per lineal inch of roller is not to 
 exceed the product of 5<)0-lbs. by the square root of the diameter in 
 inches (500.Vd). 
 
 (10). — Trrllin, or Lattice Girders. — The ordinary trellis or lattice 
 girder consists of a pair of horizontal chords and two series of diagonals 
 inclined in opposite directions (Fig. tl). The system of tnllis is said 
 to be single, double, treble, — according to the number of diagdiials met 
 by the same vertical section. 
 
 II 
 
T 
 
 48 
 
 TRELLIS, Oil LATTICE GIUDEUS. 
 
 Vortical stifFenors. united to the chords mid diagonals, may be intro- 
 duced at retrular intervals. 
 
 Figs. 7, 8, 9, 10 shew appropriate sections for the top chord ; the 
 bottom chord may be formed of fished and riveted plates, or of links 
 and [lins. 
 
 The verticals and diagonals may bo of an L, T. I. H, i^ or other 
 suitable section, but the diagonals, except in the case of a single system of 
 trellis, are usually flat bars, riveted together at the points of intersection. 
 
 An objection to this class cf girder is the number of the joints. 
 
 The stresses in the duigonals are determined on the assumption that 
 the shearing force at any vertical section is ecjually distributed between 
 the diagonals met by that section, which is e(|uivalent to the substitution 
 of a lui'dn stress for the different stresses in the several bars. 
 
 r. (J., let »' be the ;>(7v;('A»/'/(Moad concentrated at each apex in Fig. 6. 
 
 Let be the inclination of the diagonals to the vertical. 
 
 The reaction at .1 == 7^. v, and the shearing force at the section MX 
 == 7J,. u- - 4. >r - U. ir. 
 
 This shearing force must be transmitted through the diagonals. 
 Hence, the stress in ah due to the permanent load -= 
 
 U. w 
 
 sec == 
 
 -. u\ sec 0, 
 
 Again, let w' be the flee load concentrated at an apex. 
 
 The live load produces in ah the yrniffst stress of the same kind as 
 that due to the permanent load, when it covers the longer segment 
 up to and including b. 
 
WARUEN GIRDP:R. 
 
 49 
 
 55 
 
 Tlic sheariivj; force at J/.V ( == tlie n-actidu at .1) i,s thou '~.w', and 
 
 55 
 
 the correspond! II ii: stress in ah is ' '-.w'.sirO. 
 ' ' ('.4 
 
 •'• the maxiniuiu stress in nh due to botli kinds of loads = 
 
 /7 55 A 
 
 The sheariiiiT t'oree ]irnduces its (jrmto^t eff, ct in rcrirsiiKj the strrss 
 in (ih due to the piTuiaiii iii load, when the live IikmI covers the shurffr 
 sejriueiit up to and iiieludlMi:' n. 
 
 5 
 
 The sheariiiij: force at AJX ( r- the rtaetioii at B) is then -. w', and 
 
 5 
 
 the corresponding stress in ah is —j-.ir'.sfc H; 
 
 •*• the resultant stress in (i/> when the live load covers the sliorter sej:ment 
 
 I .SVC IK 
 
 = (^•'" - .To'"')-^' 
 
 This stress may he. noirative. a»id must be provided ior by introducing 
 a counter-brace or by proportioning the bar to bear (jitfli the greatest 
 tensile and the greatest conij)ressive stress to which it may be subjected. 
 
 The stress in any other bar may bi- obt.iinetl as above. 
 
 The (7(o/-(/ stresses are greatest when the live load covers the whole 
 of the girder, and may be obtaini'd by the method of moments, or in 
 the manner described in the succeeding articles. 
 
 (11^. — Witnrn Girder. — The Warren girder consists of two hori- 
 zontal chords and a series of diagonal br 'es forming a single triangula- 
 tiou, or zig-zag, Fig. 11. 
 
 The principles which regulate the construction of trellis girders are 
 equally applicable to tho.oc of the Warren type.. 
 
 The cro.ss-girders ('loor-beams) are spaced so as to occur at the apex 
 of each triangle. 
 
 When the platform is supported at the top chords, the resistance of 
 
50 
 
 WARREN GIRDER. 
 
 
 the Btructure to lateral flexure may be increased by horizontal bracing 
 between the cross-girders and by diagonal bracing between the main- 
 
 girders. 
 
 When the platform is supported at the bottom chords, additional cross- 
 girders may be suspended from the apices in the upper chords, which also 
 have the eflfect of adding to the rigidity of the main-girders. 
 
 Let w be the dead load concentrated at an apex, or joint. 
 
 w' " " live 
 
 I *' " span of the girder. 
 
 k " " depth " " 
 
 s " ** length of each diagonal brace. 
 
 
 " to the vertical 
 
 ti " " inclination " 
 N " " number of joints 
 
 Two cases will be considered. 
 
 Case I. — All the joints loaded. 
 
 Chord Stresses. — These stresses are greatest when the live load covers 
 the whole of the girder. 
 
 Let *S^„ be the shearing force at a vertical section between the joints 
 n and n + 1. 
 
 Let H„ be the horizontal chord stress between the joints n-l and n + 1. 
 
 The total load due to both dead and live loads = (w + w'). N- 1. 
 
 w + w' 
 
 The reaction at each abutment due to this total load = 
 The shearing forces in the different bays are, 
 
 10 + w' 
 2 
 
 N-l. 
 
 So = 
 
 w + w' 
 Si = — 5 . ^^3, 
 
 S,= 
 
 2 
 
 w + w' 
 
 . iV-1, between and 1, 
 a 1 » 2, 
 
 iV-5. 
 
 S^ = 
 
 w -f- w 
 
 and S„ = 
 
 . iV-7, 
 w + w 
 
 " 3 " 4. 
 
 . (iV-2n-l) 
 
 •T 
 
 he corresponding diagonal stresses are, 
 So-see 1^, Si.sec ^ , S^.$ec 9. 
 
WARREN GIRDER. 
 
 31 
 
 The last stresses multiplied by sin d give the increments of the chord 
 stresses at each joint. Thus, 
 
 I 
 N.k 
 
 H, = tension in 2 = ^o- <«« ^ = 9 — . iV-1, 
 
 _ w + w' l_ N-\ 
 
 2 k' N ' 
 
 II2 ~ compression in 13 = S^. tan d + Si. tan d 
 
 _ to + w' I N- 1 w + w' l^ iV-3 _ tp-^w ' l_ 2.(iV-2) 
 
 " 2 Ic N "*" 2 k' N ~ "Ik' N 
 
 „ „ „ w^-xo' I 3.(.V-3) 
 iZ, = tension in 2.^ = Hy\-Sy. tand + Sy tand=: ___._• 
 
 w + w' I 4.(iV-4) 
 B^ = comp'n in 36 = //, + S,. tan e + S3, tan e = ^ -r j^ 
 
 and j^„ = horizontal stress in chord, between the joints n-1 and n + l 
 
 - ^ —.— . "^ — 7= — , being a tension for a bay in the bottom 
 
 chord, and a compression for a bay in the top chord. 
 
 JVb^e. — The same results may be obtained by the method of momenta. 
 e. g., find the chord stress between the joints n-1 and n + 1. 
 
 Let a vertical plane divide the girder a little on the right of n. 
 
 The portion of the girder on the left of the secant plane is kept in 
 equilibrium by the reaction at the left abutment, the horizontal stresses 
 in the chords, and the stress in the diagonal n, 7i + !• 
 
 Take moments about the joint n, 
 
 ■'• //„. k 
 
 w 
 
 + 
 
 to' 
 
 
 2 
 
 * 
 
 w 
 
 + 
 
 to' 
 
 I 
 
 n. I 
 
 iV-l.n.^ -n-l.w-^w'.^^ 
 
 .1. n. 
 
 N-n. 
 
 2 N 
 
 .'. //„ = &c. 
 
 Diagonal Stresses due to dead load. 
 
 Let d^ be the stress in the diagonal n, n + \ , due to the dead 
 
 load. 
 
 The shearing forces in the different bays due to the dead load are, 
 
 -^.iV- 1, between and 1, ^.iV-3, between 1 and 2 
 
 Z-N-^ " 2 " 3,|.iNr-7, " 3 " 4 
 2 ^ 
 
 and — .(iV-2 n-1), between n and n + l. 
 
52 
 
 WARREN GIRDER. 
 
 The corresponding diagonal stresses are, 
 
 w 
 "2 
 
 w 
 
 70 
 
 a compression ^.^- 1- «ec. = -^.iV- 1. — — (f, in 01, 
 
 = (Z, in 12, 
 c?j in 23, 
 
 a tension --.iv- 3. «fc. 0= -c^Jy - o. , 
 
 1^ u li 
 
 W 
 
 W 
 
 a compression — 
 
 — .JV- 5. sec. =— .iV- 5.-.- = 
 
 A; 
 
 and the stress in the n-th diagonal between n and n + I is. 
 
 ?tf 
 
 /,.= -:5-. (.V-2»-l). 
 
 /^ 
 
 being a tension or compression according as the brace slopes down or 
 up towards the centre. 
 
 Diagonal stresses due to live load. 
 
 The live load produces the greatest stress in any diagonal, («, n + 1), 
 of the same kind as that due to the dead load, when it covers the longer 
 of the segments into which the diagonal divides the girder; represent 
 this maximum stress by Z)„. 
 
 The live load produces the greatest stress in any diagonal {n, n + 1), 
 of a kind opposite to that due to the dead load, when it covers the 
 shorter of the segments into which the diagonal divides the girder; 
 represent this maximum stress by D',,. 
 
 The shearing force at any section due to the live load as it crosses the 
 girder is the reaction at the end of the unloaded segment, and the cor- 
 responding diagonal stress is the product of this shearing force by sec 6, 
 
 or -. 
 
 K 
 
 The 
 />» = 
 
 values of the different diagonal stresses are, 
 
 = compression in ^ when all the joints are loaded 
 
 s w' N.N- 1 
 
 A = 
 
 N ' 
 
 tension in 1 2 when all the joints except one are loaded 
 s w' N-l. N-2 
 
 ~k 2" N 
 
 Dj = compression in 2 3 
 
 _ s ro' N-2.N-3 
 
 ^T2' N 
 
 Di = tension in 3 4 
 
 _ s w^ N- 3.^-4 : 
 
 "IT N 
 
 " 1 and 2 
 
 <' 1,2, and 3 
 
WARREN GIRDER. 
 
 63 
 
 D^ = stress in ?», n + 1 when all the joints except 1, 2, 3 . . . and n loaded 
 
 _s w'. N-n. N- n-\ 
 
 ~ /? 2 N ' 
 
 //,= stress in 1 before the load comes upon the girder = 
 
 D\ z= compression in 1 2 when the joint 1 is loaded =!_,—. 1 
 
 S Hi' 
 
 i>'2 = tension "23 " joints 1 and 2 " =-I —.3 
 
 C 'If J 
 
 D'a = compression " 34 " " 1, 2,&3 " = /•• "y'^ 
 
 /)'„ = stress in 7i, n + 1, 
 
 " l,2,...&?t" = -7 
 
 s w' H. n + I 
 
 fc iV 2 
 
 The total maximum stress in the ?t-th diagonal of the sa7/if kind as 
 that due to tlie dead load = </„ + J)„. 
 
 The resultant stress in the n-ih diagonal when the load covers the 
 shorter segment "= d„ - />'„. 
 
 This resultant stress is of the same kind as that due to the dead load 
 so long as </„ > Z>'„, and need not be considered since </„ + A, is the 
 maximum stress of that kind. 
 
 If D'„ > d„. it is necessary to provide for a stress in the given diago- 
 nal of a kind opposite to that due to d„ + JJ„, and equal in amount to 
 
 D'. - 'L- 
 
 This is effected by counterbracing or by proportioning the bar to bear 
 both the stresses r/, + /)„ and D'„ - d„. 
 
 Case II. — Ordi/ joints denoted hy even numbers haded. 
 
 Chord Stresses. — The stresses are greatest when the live load covers 
 the whole of the girder. 
 
 »'■ ! 
 
64 
 
 WARREN GIRDER. 
 
 iV-2 
 The total load due to both dead and live loads = (w> + «?'). — r — . 
 
 w + w' -7— — 
 The reaction at each abutment due to this total load= — -, .iV- 2. 
 
 To find H,. take moments about 1, .'• H,.k = — j — -V- 2. ~ 
 
 
 2 Hk- '^•^"' iv^r9 o ^ 
 
 I 
 l_ 
 
 N 
 
 4, 
 
 - (to + w?'). ^. 
 
 4 iV 
 
 -(«^ + ^«').2.^. 
 
 " //« 
 
 n, and^r*^ let n be even ; 
 
 5-.A; = 
 
 w + ?o' 
 
 4 •^-2-]^ 
 
 -(w +w'). j^ln-'I + 7t-4 + ... + 6 + 4 + 2| 
 
 n 71. 71 - 2 1 
 4~ J 
 
 iV- / 4 
 
 and, Zr„ == 
 
 i« 
 
 + 10' I 71. iV- n 
 
 Next let 71 be odd. 
 
 4 • fc' ^ 
 
 . . J?„.A; = — - — . N- 2. n. ^. 
 4 JV 
 
 ~(w + w). -^.\n-2 ^ 71-4 + ... + 5 + 3 + 1| 
 = (wj + w'VJl J N-2.n 71-1 
 
 ">4-{ 
 
 and, i7„= -^— . ^ 
 
 4 4 
 
 W + 70' ? iV- 2.7i -71-1* 
 
 i\r 
 
 -AT, 
 
 iVb^e. — If — be even, 
 
 .'. /ijv^, the stress in the middle bay = — zrpi — T.iv 
 
 r 
 
 16 ■ k 
 
HOWE TRCSS. 
 
 55 
 
 If ^ be odd, 
 
 :.IIk, the Btress in the middle bay^ 
 r » 
 
 k 
 
 16 'k' N ' 
 Diagonal stresses due to the dead load. 
 The shearing forces in the difftrent bays due to the dead load arc, 
 
 w 
 
 10 
 
 ■ic 
 
 .N-2 between and 2,- . JV- 6 between 2 and 4, — . A"- 10 
 4 4 4 
 
 between 4 and 6, etc. 
 
 The corresponding diagonal stresses are, 
 
 rfo in 1= r- 
 
 w 
 
 . jV - 2 = <i, in 1 :i 
 
 w 
 
 d, in 2 3 = -r. -,. A^- 4 = u\ in 3 4 
 
 - k 4 
 
 rf, in 4 5 = j^ .-^. iV- 10 = rfj in 5 6 
 
 etc., 
 
 etc.. 
 
 etc. 
 
 Thus the stresses in the diagonals which meet at an unloaded joint 
 are equal in magnitude but opposite in kind. 
 Diagonal stresses due to the live load. 
 These are found as in case I, and 
 
 D, = />, D', = D\ 
 
 D, = D, D\ = //, 
 
 A = A ^'. = ^'» 
 If _ is odd, there is a single stress at the foot of each of these columns. 
 
 The maximum resultant stress due to both dead and live loads is 
 obtained as before. 
 
 e. g., the maximum resultant stress in 3 4 when the longer segment 
 is loaded = d^ + Dj = dj + Dj, 
 
 and the maximum resultant stress in 3 4 when the shorter segment 
 is loaded = d^ - D\ = d.. - D\. 
 
 j^ote. — e is generally GO^, in which case s = ^~]^' 
 
 (12). — Howe Truss. 
 
 Fig. 14 is a skeleton diagram of a Howe truss. 
 
 The truss may be of timber, of iron, or of timber and iron combined. 
 
 The chords of a timber truss usually consist of three or more parallel 
 
56 
 
 HOWE THLSS. 
 
 nionibcrs, pliipcd a little tlistaiuH! apart so as to allow iron susponders 
 with sercwt'd ends to pass bctwtvn tlirin (Kii;s. 15, 1<; ). 
 
 Each meuibor is uiade up of a number of lengths scarfed or fished 
 together (Figs. 17, 18). 
 
 The main-braces, shewn by the full diagonal lines in Fig. 14 are 
 composed of two or metre members. 
 
 The counter-braees. which are introduced to withstand the v<^ffect of 
 a live load, and are shewn by the dotted diagonal lines in Fig. 14, are 
 either single or are composed of two or more members. They are set 
 between the main braces, and are bolted to the latter at tlie points of 
 intersection. 
 
 The main braces and counters abut against solid hard wood or 
 hollow cast-iron angle-blocks (Fig. 10). They are designed to with- 
 stand compressive forces only, and arc kept in place by tightening up 
 the nuts at the heads of the suspendi-rs. 
 
 The angle-blocks extend over the whole width of the chords; if they 
 are made of iron, they may be strengthened by ribs. 
 
 If the bottom cliord is of iron it may be constructed on the same 
 principles as those employed for other iron girders. It often consists of 
 a number of links, set on edge, and connected by pins (Figs. 19, 20). 
 
HOWE TRUSS. 
 
 57 
 
 In Nucli a case tlie lower annK'-bloeks should have grooves to receive the 
 burs. HO as to provoiit lateral flt-xure. 
 
 It'tlio truss is iiiaile cntinly of iron, the top chord uiay be foruiod of 
 K'li^ths of cast-iron provided with suital)le flanges by which they can be 
 bolted together. Angle-blocks may also be cast in the same piece with 
 the chord. 
 
 To determine the stresses in the different members, the same data are 
 assumed as i"or the Warren girder, except that N is now the number of 
 panels. 
 
 (.'Iiiird strrssi's. — These stresses are greatest when the live load covers 
 tlie whole of the girder. 
 
 Jict II„ be the chord stress in the 7j-th panel. 
 
 The total load due to both dead and live loads == w + ?//. iV- 1. 
 
 The reaction at each abutment due to this total load == — ^ — . A'-l. 
 
 •■J 
 
 Let a plane MM' divide the truss as in Fig. 14. The portion of the 
 truss on the left of the secant plane is kept in e<|uilibrium by the load 
 upon that portion, the reaction at the left abutment, the chord stresses 
 in the ?i-th panels, and the tension in the Ji-th suspender. 
 
 Jursf, let the load be on the top chord and take moments about the 
 foot of the n-th suspender ; 
 
 7/1 4- 1/1 / 
 
 I 71 . H - 1 
 
 Ar-"' + ''-N'—^- 
 
 W + w' , 11. N'— 11 
 
 -. /, 
 
 or //„ = 
 
 jw + w' I n, N— n 
 
 Next let the load be on the bottom chord and take moments about the 
 head of the H-th suspender. 
 
 .'. //„. k = 
 
 IV + iv' , //. X- n 
 
 I. 
 
 , as before. 
 
 2 ■ X 
 
 Thus, 7/„ is the same for corresponding panels, whether the load is on 
 the top or bottom chord. 
 
 DiagojKil stresses due to the dead load : — 
 
 Let V'„ be the shearing force in the «-th panel, or the tension on the 
 ?/-tli suspender due to the dead load. 
 
 First, let the load be on the top chord, 
 
 TV ^^' \ /^- 1 \ 
 
 .-. y ,= -^.X- I - n. w = ^'''\— — »^ )• 
 Next, let the load be on the bottom chord, 
 
 ••• v'„= ^ . ix- i)-:n.w --^v. (^ -u). 
 
58 
 
 HOWE TRUSS. 
 
 The corresponding diagonal stresses are, 
 
 Diagonal stresses due to the live load. 
 
 Let F"„ be the shearing force in the «-th pan^l, or tension on the «-th 
 suspender, when the live load covers the longer segment. 
 
 First, let the load be on the top chord. 
 
 The greatest stress in the H-th brace of the same kind as that produced 
 by the dead load occurs when all the panful points on the right of MM' 
 are loaded. 
 
 .*. V"„, the shearing force on the left of MM' -■= the reaction at 
 
 w' M— ?i 
 H"' ■^~ n -1. — rj— , and the corresponding diagonal stress 
 
 " k " k' 2 ^' N 
 
 Hence, the resultant tension in the n-th suspender due to both dead 
 and live loads = F„ = F„ + F', 
 
 /iV-1 X ir ._ 
 
 j\r-n 
 
 iV 
 
 T f 
 
 and the resultant maximum compression on the n-th brace due to both 
 dead and live loads 
 
 _ * T7 * i /iV-l \ w' 
 
 .V-H-l. 
 
 N-n 
 
 N 
 
 }- 
 
 d„+D„ 
 
 The live load tends to produce the greatest stress in the 7i-th counter 
 when it covers the shorter segment up to and including the nth panel 
 point. Even then there will be no stress in the counter unless the effect 
 of the live load exceeds that of the dead load in the (n + 1 )-th brace. 
 
 The shearing force on the right of MM' = the reaction at N' 
 
 I)'n the corresponding diagonal stress = — — ■ 
 
 k 2 N 
 and the resultant stress in the counter = !)'„ - (/„.^, 
 
 s ( w' n.n + l /N-3 \ ) 
 
 '=lc'l2-N--"'\-li V} 
 
 Next let the load be on the bottom chord. 
 
 ... F' =!!^7V-„^^±1 
 „ s w' ,_ N- 11 + 1 
 
 _ w' n.n 4- 1 
 
 \'~ir' 
 
PRATT, OR WHIPPLE TRUSS. 
 Hence V„= ?',+ F'„ = t«. (^^ - n) + ~.N-n. 
 
 and, < f /;„ - y| ^- (-^ - ") + y ^- "• —jr~ \ 
 
 59 
 
 N 
 
 Also the fltresfl in the n-th counter is 
 
 71+1 
 
 JVb<c. — A common value of « is 45", vrhen sec e= -^ = \ .414, and 
 I 
 
 tan e 
 
 N.k 
 
 1. 
 
 The end panels and posts, shewn by the dotted lines in Fig. 14, may 
 be omitted when the platform is suspended from the lower chords. 
 (13). — Pratt, or Whipple truss. 
 
 Fig. 21 is a skeleton diagram of the simplest from of Pratt truss. 
 The verticals are now in compression, and the braces in tension, so that 
 the angle-blocks are placed above the top and below the bottom chord. 
 
 Counter-braces, shewn by the dotted diagonals in the Fig,, are to be 
 introduced if necessary, to withstand the effect of a live load. 
 
 The principles which regulate the construction of Howe trusses are 
 equally applicable to those of the Pratt type. 
 
 The stresses in the different members are found precisely as in the 
 preceding article. 
 
 Fig. 22 shews a modification of the Pratt truss, the braces forming 
 two independent systems, which may be treated separately. 
 

 60 
 
 PRATT, OR WHIPPLE TRUSS. 
 
 Let 6' be the inclination of AB to the vertical. 
 
 " ^ ■' " Al, CD, '' 
 
 Chord sfressrs.— These stresses are greatest when the live load covers 
 the whole of tlie girder. 
 
 The reaction at A from the system ABCD.., == 4.(w + w'). 
 
 « 1-3 ==^_(^w + ic') 
 
 The shearing forces in the different bays are, 
 
 4. (^v + w') in AC, from the system ABCD... 
 
 r,-(u- + w') In AC 
 ^.(w + ic') in C2, 
 ^.(if + jf') in 2E 
 
 ^12 3... 
 ABCD... 
 ^123... 
 ABCD... 
 ^123... 
 ABCD,,, 
 ^123... 
 
 /in 
 
 2.(iv + w') in Ei, " " 
 
 2^.(?« + «;') in iG " " 
 
 ].(w + w') in G^6, " " 
 
 -.(?« + ?«') in 6 1 " " 
 
 The corresponding diagonal stresses are, 
 
 4. (w-{-w').sec O'in AB,3l(w + w').sec 6 in A l,S.(w + w'). sec On 
 CD, 2^. (iv + 7r'),sec in 23, etc. 
 
 Hence the top chord stresses are, 
 
 C, in AC = 4.(w + w').tan 6' + 3h(w + w').tan fl, (7, in C2 = C, + 
 3. (w + w'). tan e = 4.(w + w')MmO' + 6^.(w + w').ia7ie, C, m2E = 
 G'l + 2\. {w + xc').tan 6 == 4.(w + w').tan 0' + 9.(w + w'). tan 6, etc. 
 
 The bottom chord stresses are, 
 
 T,mBl=z4.{w + w').tane', T, in 1 D= T, + 3^. (w + w').tan 8 
 = 4.(w + w').tan 6' + 3i.(w + w').tan e= C, 
 So, T; = (7,, T, = q,, etc." etc. 
 
 Again the stress in any diagonal 4 5 of the system A 1 2.... due to the 
 dead load = l^.w.sec e. 
 
 The live load produces the greatest stress in 45 of the saoie kind as 
 that due to the dead load, when it is concentrated at all the panel points 
 of the system A 12 3... on the right of 4. 
 
 1 K 
 
 The reaction at A is then -^ .w\ 
 
 o 
 
 15 
 
 and the corresponding diagonal stress = — .w.' sec 0, 
 
 o 
 
FINK TRUSS. 
 
 61 
 
 •*• Tbe maximum resultant stress in 4 5 = ( — av + ~-.i''' ) .sec ff 
 
 The live load tends to produce the greatest stress in any counter 5 8, 
 
 when it is concentrated at all the panel points of the system^ 12 3 
 
 on the left of 8. 
 
 •J 
 The reaction at the right abutment is then '-.w', 
 
 ■i 
 
 and the corresponding stress in the counter = -jv' seed; 
 
 '8 . 1 
 
 *« the resultant stress in the coun 
 
 •■■■=(4-"''-2-")- 
 
 sec e. 
 
 ~. w.sec being the stress in 6 7 due to the dead load. 
 
 Similarly the stresses in any other diagonal and counter may be 
 found. 
 
 {U).—Fmk Truss. 
 
 Fig. 23 represents a Fiuk truss. The platform may be either at the 
 top or bottom. 
 
 The verticals are always struts and the obliques are always ties. 
 The stresses in the different members are to be calculated for a 
 maximum distributed load. 
 
 Let weight upon post IC, i. e., ^ of weight between A and 2. be TF, 
 " 2D, " " A " 4, be W., 
 
 " 3F, " " 2 " 4, be W^ 
 
 " 4F, " " A " li, be W^ 
 
 and let TFj, Wf, Wj, be the weights upon the posts 5(7, Gil, and 71, 
 respectively. 
 
 Let the inclinations of A.C, AD, AF, to the vertical be a, $, y, res- 
 pectively. 
 
 Let Ti, Ti, T^, be the tensions in the ties as in the Hg. 
 
 The tensions in the ties meeting at the foot of a post are evidcnily 
 equal. 
 
 
62 
 
 BOLLMAN TRUSS. 
 ••• 2.7',. cos a = TT, 
 
 2.7,co. y= ^\ + {T,+ T,).cos^+(^T,^T,).cosa 
 2.T,.cosa= W, 
 
 2.T,.cos(i= W, + (T,+ Tr).co8a 
 2.Tj.cosa= Wj 
 
 ■•■ r, = l.W,.sec a., T, = \.(w, +i!i-tZ»).„e,J 
 
 ^a = 5. ^^3- sec a 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^-M*"' 
 
 + 
 
 ^i±^^w^±^^w^j^^^^\+w, 
 
 ''-]■ 
 
 sec y 
 
 n = l m. sec a, r. = 1. (r. + J!^).„,*., 
 
 and 2^7 = —. TF;. sec a. 
 Again the compre sion in A2 = r, sm a + T,. sin + T,. sin y 
 
 at 2= T,. sin + T,. sin Y 
 
 ^" 24 =- T,. sin 0+T,. sin y + T, sin a 
 
 " at 4=- T,.siny. 
 
 etc. etc. 
 
 the compression in 1<7 = 2. 7; .cos a == W^ 
 " 2D= 2.T,.cos 
 " 3E=: 2.T,.cos a= W, 
 " iG = 2.r,.cos y 
 etc. etc. 
 
 e. g., let the load upon the struss be a uniformly distributed load, W. 
 
 .-. W,= W,= ^. = r,= f, Tf,= >re=|:,and IF.= f. ' 
 
 I, -i3 _ij- /; = ___. 5ec a, T^ T,= —■ sec 0, and T,=~-secy. 
 
 If the truss represented by Fi^. 23 is inverted, another system is 
 obtained m which the obliques are struts and the vertical ties. 
 (l5).—J]oUman Truss. 
 
 Fig. 24 represents a Bollman truss. The platform may be either at 
 the top or bottom. 
 
 The verticals are always struts and the obliques are always ties 
 Each pair of tics, as AC, BC, is independent, and supports the load 
 
 
QUADRANGULAR AND POST SYSTEMS. 
 
 63 
 
 upon a vertical, {. e,, the weight of panel, or one-half of the weight be- 
 tween the panel points A and E. 
 
 Let T , Tj be the stresses in AC, BC, respectively. 
 Let W\ be the weight upon the post DC 
 
 Let a„ ttj, be the inclinations of AC, BC, respectively, to the vertical. 
 sin ttj _j /T7 Ttr '^'^ ^1 
 
 f,= W. 
 
 and 'R = W. 
 
 sin (a, + ajj)' ' ' ' sin (a, + a.^) 
 
 The stress in any other tie may be obtained in the same manner. 
 The compression in the top chord is the sum of the horizontal compo- 
 nents of the stresses in all the ties which meet at one end, 
 (16). — Quadrangular and Post si/stems. — 
 
 Fig. 25 represents the Quadrangular truss in which tiic bottom chord 
 is supported at intermediate points half way between the verticals. 
 
 Fig. 26 represents the Post system. In reality ;}- is the Pratt 
 (Linville) truss shewn in Fig. 22, modified by inclining the compression 
 members at an economical angle. 
 
 The stresses in the different members are to be calculated in the 
 manner described in the preceding articles. 
 
 (17). — Bowstring girder, or truss. 
 
 The bowstring girder in its simplest form is represented by Fig. 27, 
 and is an excellent structure in point of strength and economy. 
 
 The top chord is curved, and either springs from shoes (sockets) 
 which are held together by a horizontal tie, or has its ends riveted 
 to those of the tie. 
 
 The strongest bow is one composed of iron or steel cylindrical tubes, 
 but any suitable form may be adopted, and the inverted trough offers 
 special facilities for the attachment of verticals and diagonals. 
 
64 
 
 BOWSTRING GIRDEH, OR TRUSS. 
 
 The tie is constructed on the same principles as those employed for 
 other iron jrirders, but in its best form it consists of flat bars set 
 on edge and connected with the shoes by gibs and cotters. 
 
 The platform is suspended from the bow by means of vertical bars 
 which arc usually of an I section, and are set with the greatest breadth 
 transverse, so as to increase the resistance to lateral flexure. In large 
 bridges the webs of verfieals and diagonals may be lattice-work. 
 
 If the load upon the girder is uniformly distributi'd and stationary, 
 verticals only are required for its suspension, and the neutral axis of the 
 bow should be a parabola. An irregularly distributed load, such as tliat 
 due to a passing train, tends to change the shape of the bow, and di- 
 agonals are introduced to resist this tendency. 
 
 A circular arc is often used instead of a parabola. 
 
 To determine the stresses in the different members, assuming that the 
 axis /lZ^(7of the top chord is a parabola : — 
 
 Let w bo the dead load per lineal ft. 
 
 " I " span of the girder. 
 
 '' Je " greatest di'pth BD of the gird;T. 
 
 Chord strcssfs. — These stresses are greatest when the live load covers 
 the whole of the girder. 
 
 The total load due to both dead and live loads = (ir + w'). I 
 
 u- + ?r' 
 
 The reaction at each abutment due to this total load 
 
 -. I 
 
 Let // be the horizontal thrust at the crown. 
 Let T " " tension in the tie. 
 
 Imagine the girder to be cut by a vertical plane a little on the right 
 of Bl>. The portion ABD is kept in equilibrium by the reaction ut A 
 the weight upon Al), and the forces // and 1\ 
 
BOWSTRING GIRDER, OR TRUSS. 65 
 
 Take moments about B and D ; 
 
 8 
 and • ' J =- — — . -j-==Jl 
 
 Lot //' be the thrust alonj^ the cliord at any point /*. 
 Let X be the liorizoiital distanee of 7' from li. 
 
 The portion J'Ji is kept in i'(|uilibriuni ])y the thrust // at B, the 
 thrust //' at /* and the weinlit {w + tr').x between /' and Ji ; 
 
 ••• /r.siv' (•- //'•-'=. IP + (»• + »')■■../•-, 
 
 i being tlie inelination of the tanjxent at P to the horizontal. 
 Hence, the thrust at .1 = C'~r~-l) ( 777-7^ + 1 j 
 
 Diiigrntnl strcssri^ diw to Urc fo'uf. 
 
 Assume that the hiad is concentrated at the panel points, and let it 
 move from .1 towards C 
 
 l^m^m 
 
 ri6.2L8 
 
 If the diau'onals sliipr as in the Fig. 28, thi'y are all ties, and the live 
 load produces the greatest stress in any one ol'them. as QS, wlu'ii all the 
 panel points from A up to and including (^ are loaded. 
 
 Let ,r, y. be the horizontal and vertical co-ordinates, respectively, of 
 any point on the parabola witii respect to B as origin. 
 
 Tlu' e((uati(»n of the parabola is. // — - " ..r- 
 
 (1) 
 
 Li't tlu! tangent at the ap'X /* meet />>/) produced in L, and /-^'' jiro- 
 duced in A'. 
 
 Draw the horizontal line I'M. 
 
 From the properties of the parabola, LM ^- 2. BM. 
 
 Let I'M --= X, and BM ■■= >/. 
 
 From the similar triangles L MP and LDl^, 
 
 M r~ D E '"' ~ ~ xTt^E' 
 
66 
 
 BOWSTRING GIRDER, OR TRUSS. 
 
 2.y 8.x 
 
 . CE l-2x 
 
 (i-2xy 
 
 Sx 
 
 'QE^l + 2x (2) 
 
 Draw EF perpendicular to QS produced, and imagine the girder to 
 be cut by a vertical plane a little on the right oi' FQ. 
 
 The portion of the girder between FQ and C is kept in equilibrium 
 by the reaction li at C, the thrust in the bow at F, the tension in the 
 tie at Q, and the stress in the diagonal QS. 
 
 Denote the stress by Z>„. and let the panel OQ be the u-th. 
 
 Let be the inclination of QS to the horizontal. 
 
 Take moments about E, 
 
 :. £>,, EF -- Jl CE 
 orD„ = R0 cosec . 
 Let N be the total number of panels, 
 
 :. j^is & panel length, and w^ is a panel weight. 
 
 (^) 
 
 Also X = 71. ^r^ - ^^ , and . . , _ 
 
 ^V 2' lr2x QE 
 
 I -2.x CE N-n 
 
 H 
 
 R, the reaction at C when the // panel points preceding Tare loaded 
 
 _?f^ , n.n T 1 
 
 Hence, equation (3) becomes. 
 
 iV 
 
 J^n = -^-f.n + 1. .coscc 
 
 4.k 
 
 w 
 
 Again, by equation (1), /.• - ST=~. DT'= 4./.-. ( ^Lll _ A' 
 
 >ST ST 
 
 Thus, finally, 
 
 ...^/ iv^-„[^^+^-K^-'^-i)(«+oi^]* 
 
 ^"~ 8 ^ -A^ 
 
 This formula evidently applies to all the diagonals between B and C. 
 
 (5) 
 
BOAVSTRIXG GIRDER WITH ISOSCELES BRACING. 
 
 G7 
 
 (2) 
 ' to 
 
 um 
 
 the 
 
 ;^) 
 
 'i) 
 
 
 r>) 
 
 Similarly, it may bo easily shewn that the stress in any din<j;onal 
 between B ami A is given by an expression of precisely the same t'orm. 
 
 Hence, the value of I), in ecjuation (5) is general for the whole girder. 
 
 A load moving from C towards A requires diagonals inclined in an 
 opposite direction to those shewn in Fig. 28. 
 
 JSt n'ss<)i in the verticals due to the live load. 
 
 Let V„ be the stress in the »i-tli vertical PQ due to the live load. 
 This stress is evidently a compression, and is a maximum when all the 
 panel points from A up to and including are loaded. 
 
 Imagine the girder to be cut by a i)lane *S" .S"' very near PO, Fig. 2S. 
 The portion of the girder between »S" S" and C is kept in equilibrium 
 by the reaction li' at C, the thrust in the bow at P, the tension in the 
 tie at 0, and the compressittn V„ in the vertical. 
 
 Take moments about E. 
 
 V,, QE =-- R'.CE., or T; = R'. — , 
 and R\ the reaction at <' when the ('(-1) panel points from ^-1 up to 
 
 1 • I J- r\ 111 "■' ,"-"-1 
 
 and includniir O are loaded = — ./.- 
 
 ■z ' 
 
 Ilenc, V 
 
 
 (6) 
 
 a general formula for all the verticals. 
 
 Let r„ be the tension in the ii -th vertical due to the dead load. The 
 resultant stress in it when the live load covers AO is i\-]\, and if 
 negative, is the maximum compression to which J^Q is subjected. 
 
 If v,-V„ is positive, the vertical PQ is never in conq)res.sion. 
 
 The maximum tension in a vertical occurs when the live load covers 
 
 the whole of the girder and == !«''.-+ the tension due to the dead load. 
 
 Note. — The same results are obtained when N is odd. 
 (18). — Buicst ring girder with isoscelrti Itrariug. 
 
 Diagon(d stresses due to the dead load. — Undera dead load the bow is 
 equilibrated, and the tie subjected to a uniform tensile stress eijual in 
 amount to thii horizontal thrust at the crown. The braces merely 
 serve to transmit the load to the bow and are all ties. 
 
 Let y,, T.^ be the tensile stresses in the two diagonals meeting at any 
 panel point Q. Let", f^j, be the inclinutions of the diagonals to the hori- 
 zontal. 
 
 Lot irb-' the panel weight susr^ended from Q. 
 
68 
 
 BOWSTRING GIRDER WITH ISOSCKLES BRACING. 
 
 Tiic stress in the tie on each side of Q is the same, and thuieiore 
 T*,, 7j, and TFare necessarily in equilibrium. 
 
 . — — :, and y, "- >K -r -. 
 
 «<« ('^ + ",)' ' sin (y, + W,) 
 
 Hence, T, - >r. -;- 
 
 Diagonal stresses due to the live lorn/. 
 
 Let N be the number of half panels. 
 
 2.1 . 2.1 
 
 The lentrth of a panel == —rr-', the weight at a panel point = "•'. -~^- 
 
 Let the load move from A towards C. All the braces indiiKil like 
 
 07' are ties, and all those inolinrd like (Jl' dw struts, 
 girdir from A up to and including (). 
 
 Tlie live load produces the greatest stress in OT when it covers the 
 
 Denote this stress by />„ ; ()G is the /;-th half-panel. 
 
 As before, I),. EF - A*. CE. ( 1 ) . 
 
 rpv- 1 1 4/» ' ' ] • n '"'•"•*' 'i + 2 
 
 The load upon AO = n.w , — , and • • Ji = — -— . _^ 
 
 The ratio of CE to iJF is denoted by the same expression as in the 
 preceding article. 
 
 .„_»_: 2 ,^ x-» [^ t5'^!i" -')"'^"iil' (2) 
 
 ■■ " 8'//7i + l' iV ■ N-,>- 1 
 
 The live load produces the greatest stress iti OM when it covers the 
 girder up to and including D. 
 Denoti this stress by D'„ ; DG is now the 7i-i\i half panel. 
 Let W be the reaction at (\ 
 
 As before, D\r A". l]^p. cosecO, (3) 
 
 e being the angle MOD. 
 
 The weight upon AD= (h - l),!o'.— ,, and .'.li' = -^.l. -ttj— 
 
BO^VSTKING SUSPENSION lUUIMJE. 
 
 69 
 
 10 
 
 be 
 
 It may be easily aliown, as in the precediiijr article, that, 
 
 i 
 
 oe' 
 
 n+ 1 
 
 , and co8ccd = N. 
 
 [/■+ !^fi(.v-„).<] 
 
 • D' = 
 
 / H- 1 
 
 4n.K'. (N-)i) 
 
 (4) 
 
 8 k n iV ■ N-n 
 
 Hence, when the load moves from A towards C, equation (2) gives 
 the diagonal stress when n is even, and equation (4) gives the stress 
 when u is odd. 
 
 If the load moves from C towards A, the stresses are reversed in 
 kind, so that the braces have to be designed to act both as struts and 
 ties. 
 
 Note. — By inverting Fig. 29, a bowstring girder is obtained with the 
 horizontal chord in compression and the bow in tension, 
 
 (19). — Jiou-striiig Suspension Bridge, {Lentie.ular Truss). — This 
 bridge is a combination of the ordinary and inverted bowstrings. The 
 most important example is that erected at Sultash, Cornwall, which 
 has a clear span of 445— ft. The bow is a wrought-iron tube of an 
 elliptical section, stiffened at intervals by diaphragms, and the tie is a 
 pair of chains. 
 
 A girder of this class may be made to resist the action of a passing 
 load either by the stiffness of the bow, or by diagonal bracing. 
 
 In Fig. aO, let BD^k. B'I) = k'. 
 
 Let // be the horizontal thrust at B, and T the horizontal pull at B', 
 when the live load covers the whole of the girder. 
 
 //= 
 
 w + w 
 
 P 
 
 8 k + k' 
 
 r^.= T. 
 
 First, let k = k'. 
 ponding stress in a bow-string girder of span I and depth k. 
 
 •. 11= T— — :,— T) or one-half of the corres- 
 
 lo k 
 
70 
 
 CAMIiKU. 
 
 Ono-hiilf of the total loud is .supportod by the bow and one-lialf is 
 trausmittod through tlie verticals to the tie. 
 
 .".The stress in each vortical = .^.0''' + "'"), 
 
 A ^ ' 
 
 w" being the portion of the dead weight per lineal ft. borne by the ver- 
 ticals, and jY the number of panels. 
 
 The diagonals are strained nnly under a passing load. 
 
 Let /'/*' be a vertical through K, tlie point of intersection of any two 
 diagonals in the same panel, and let the load move from A towards C. 
 
 By drawing the tangent at i^and proceeding as in § (18), the expres- 
 sion for the diagonal stress in i^S, becomes as before, 
 ,. xv' . H.(//-l) /-2x 
 
 ^^"^T-'— A^'TTii^-^"*""'- (1) 
 
 Similarly the stress in the vertical QQ is 
 
 „ I «•' , n.(n-\\l-2x 
 
 \ = }(' — ^ — / — -^ '-• • 
 
 \V 2 ^'^ l+'lx 
 
 (^) 
 
 '.under these loads,--- ■ — — II . 
 o k 
 
 ir= 
 
 (3). 
 
 Next, let A* and A*' be unequal. 
 
 Let W be the weight of the bow, IF ' the weight of the tie. 
 
 F' ""^ 7r " A;'" 
 
 The verticals are not strained unless the platform is attached to them 
 along the common chord ADC. In such a case, the weight of the plat- 
 form is to be included in W '. 
 
 The tangents at P and F* evidently meet AC produced in the same 
 point 0', for EO' is independent of A or k'. Bence, the stresses in the 
 verticals and diagonals due to the passing load may be obtained as 
 before. 
 
 (20). — Camber. — Owing to the play at the joints, a bridge truss, 
 when first erected, will deflect to a much greater extent than is indi- 
 cated by theory, and the material of the truss will receive a permanent 
 set, which, however, will not prove detrimental to the stability of the 
 structure, unless it is increased by subsequent loads. 
 
 If the chords were made straight they would curve downwards, and, 
 although it does not necessarily follow that the strength of the truss 
 would be sensibly impaired, the appearance would not be pleasing. 
 
 In practice it is usual to specify that the truss is to have such a 
 camber, or upward convexity, that under ordinary loads the grade 
 line will be true and straight. 
 
 The camber may be given to the truss by lengthening the upper or 
 
CAMBER. 
 
 71 
 
 ( 
 
 shortening the lower chord, and the difference o? length should beoqual- 
 ly divided amongst all the panels. 
 
 The lengths of the wt-b uifuiber.s in a cambered truss are not the 
 same as if the chords were horizontal, and must be carefully calculatt-d, 
 otherwise the several parts will not tit accurately together. 
 Tojindnn opjiroximate value for the Camber, etc. 
 
 Let d be the depth of the truss. 
 
 Let .s-,. .v^, be the lengths of the upper and lower chords, respectively. 
 
 J^<-'t/i,/i, be the unit stresses in " " « u 
 
 Let <?,. </j, be the distances of the neutral axis from the upper and 
 lower chords respectively. 
 
 Let ^ be the radius of curvature of the neutral axis. 
 
 Let I be the span of the truss, 
 
 </i s, - / J\ (f_ I- s, f 
 
 '•~R~ l~ - E^ ^^^lt~ ~T~ ir' "PP^^'^'^mately, 
 
 the chords being assumed to be circular arcs. 
 
 Hence, the excess in length of the upper over the lower chord 
 
 Let .T„ X,, be the cambers of the upper and lower chords, respectively. 
 ^+(Z, and /^- r/ji are the radii '' " <' « 
 
 By similar triangles, 
 
 the horizontal distance between the ends of the upper chord =^^^.l 
 
 R 
 , R-d., 
 
 lower 
 
 Heuce,(-^.^jy= x,.2.{R+dd, approximately. 
 
 2 
 
 2. n = x,:2.(R- (4), approximately. 
 
 R 
 
 ^J 
 
 \2 R 
 
 
 ■ ^^^ ^*"^0'' ^ ~ 
 
 d^ 
 
 R 
 
72 
 
 TABLES. 
 
 TESTS FOR THE MATERIALS OF A BRIDGE. 
 I. WROUGHT IRON. 
 
 Tension Tests. — (1). All wrouj;ht-iron to have a limit of elasticity of 
 not \em than 2G,000-lb8. per sq. in, 
 
 (2), Full sized bars of flat, round, or wjuare iron, not over i^-aq. ins. 
 in sectional area to have an ultimate strength of 50,000-lbs. per aq. 
 in., and to stretch 12^ per cent, of the whole length. 
 
 (3). Bars i)f a larger sectional area than 4h sq. ins, to be allowed a 
 reduction of 1,000-lbs, per sq. in. for each additional sq. in. of section 
 down to a minimum of 46,000-lbs. per sq. in. 
 
 (4). Specimens of a uniform section of at least one sq. in., taken from 
 bars of 4i— sq. ins. vsection and under, to have an ultimate strength of 
 52,00Q-lbs. per sq. in., and to stretch 18 per cent, in 8-inches. 
 
 (5). Similar specimens from bars of a larger section than 4^sq. ins. 
 to be allowed a reduction of 500-lbs. per sq. in. for each additional 
 sq. in. of section, down to a minimum of 50,000-lbs, per sq. in. 
 
 (6). Similar specimens from angle and other shaped iron to have an 
 ultimate strength of 50,000-lbs. per sq. in., and to stretch 15 per cent, 
 in 8-inches. 
 
 (7). Similar specimens from plate-iron to have an ultimate strength 
 of 48,000-lbs. per sq. in., and to stretch 15 per cent, in 8-inches. 
 
 Bending Tests. — (8). All iron for tension members to bend cold, 
 without cracking, through an angle of 90° to a curvs, of which the 
 diameter is not more than twice the thickness of the piece, and at least 
 one sample in three to bend 180'^ to this curve without cracking. 
 
 (9). Specimens from plate, angle, and other shaped iron, to bend cold 
 without cracking, through an angle of 90° to a curve, of which the 
 diameter is not more than three times the thickness of the specimen. 
 
 II. STEEL (mild). 
 
 (1). The steel to have an elastic limit of 40,000-lbs. per sq. in., and 
 a co-efficient of elasticity varying from 26,000,000 to 30,000,000-lb8. 
 
 (2). Full-sized bars to have an ultimate tensile strength of 70,000 
 lbs. per sq. in., and, when marked oflf in 12-in. lengths, to shew a 
 stretch of 10 per cent, for the whole length, and of 15 per cent, at least 
 for the length including the fracture. 
 
 (3). Bars drawn down to a suitable size from the crop ends of each 
 bloom slab, and not more than one inch in thickness, to bend cold, with- 
 out cracking, through an angle of 180° to a curves, of which the diam- 
 eter is not more than the thickness of the bar. 
 
 I 
 
TABLES. 
 
 73 
 
 rth 
 
 III. CAST-IRON. 
 
 A specimen bar of the iron, 5-ft. long, 1-in. wiuare, and resting 
 upon supports 4-t't. G-inn. apart, to bear, without breaking, a weight of 
 550-lbs. .suspended at the centre. 
 
 Tables of the safe working loads upon conjprossion members 
 
 WROUOIIT-IRON. 
 
 Rntlo of IruKth to 
 
 le«»t tran»v«n(e 
 
 (lliufiiHtftn. 
 
 Sdfe w<irklii(f Imiil lu Ibpi. per «(|. In. 
 
 Katin of Icntfth to 
 
 least triuiffv<>rse 
 
 dlnit'imlou. 
 
 Sufe wcrklnB lo»il In Ibn. per iu\. In- 
 
 Flat MidH. 
 
 Hound i-udfi. 
 
 Klftt unU. 
 
 Uoiuicl (inila. 
 
 4,000 
 3,500 
 2.500 
 2,000 
 
 10 
 10 to 15 
 15 " 20 
 20 " 25 
 25 " 30 
 
 10,0000 
 9,000 
 8,000 
 7,500 
 6,800 
 
 7,000 
 6,500 
 6,000 
 5,500 
 
 5,o;-o 
 
 30 " 35 
 35 " 40 
 40 " 50 
 50 " 60 
 
 6,000 
 5,000 
 3,S(I0 
 3,000 
 
 Cast-iron compression members should not exceed 22-diam8. 
 in length and should be subject to the same stresses as those prescribed 
 
 for wrought-iron. 
 
 TIMBER. 
 
 Ratio of length to least 
 transverse dimension. 
 
 Safe load in lbs. per sq. in. 
 
 OAK. 
 
 PINE. 
 
 10 
 10 to 20 
 20 " 30 
 30 '' 40 
 
 1,000 
 800 
 600 
 400 
 
 9U0 
 700 
 500 
 
 300 
 
 RONDELET S RULE FOR OAK AND PINE. 
 
 Batio of length to least 
 transverse dimension. 
 
 Extrt'uie load in lbs. per sq. 
 in. borne by pillar without 
 lateral tlexuri!. 
 
 Safe Vforking load in lbs. per 
 
 uq.in. with "as factor 
 
 ot safety. 
 
 1 
 
 12 
 24 
 36 
 
 48 
 60 
 
 72 
 
 5,974 
 
 4,978 
 
 2,987 
 
 1,991 
 
 996 
 
 498 
 
 249 
 
 853 
 711 
 426 
 23i 
 112 
 71 
 35 
 
 In flexure, the greatest allowable stress per sq. in. may be 
 taken at 1,200-lbs for oak, and 1,000-lbs. for pine. 
 
 iV. J5. — The figures in the above tests and tables are by no means 
 absolutely fixed, and are merely given to shew the standard practice of 
 
 engineers. 
 
74 
 
 TABLES. 
 
 Table of loads for Highway Bridges. 
 
 Sp.in in feet. 
 
 City and Suburban 
 
 Bridges liable to heavy 
 
 t.rattic. 
 
 Bridges in Manufac- 
 turing Districts. 
 Ballasted Koads. 
 
 Bridges in Country 
 
 Districts, rnballast- 
 
 ed Roads. 
 
 100 and under. 
 100 ()200 .... 
 
 100 lbs. per sq. ft. 
 
 HO " " 
 
 90 lbs. per sq. ft. 
 60 •' •' 
 
 70 lbs. per sq. ft. 
 60 " " 
 
 200 to 300 .... 
 
 70 " 
 
 50 '* " 
 
 50 " " 
 
 300 to 400 .... 
 
 (JO " " 
 
 .■)0 " " 
 
 45 " 
 
 400 and over... 
 
 50 " '' 
 
 50 " 
 
 45 " " 
 
 i 
 
 Table of loads for Railway Bridges. 
 
 Dead load in 
 lbs. per 
 lineal ft. 
 
 Span in ft. 
 
 "!0 
 15 
 20 
 25 
 30 
 40 
 50 
 75 
 
 451) 
 500 
 550 
 625 
 625 
 65;> 
 700 
 750 
 800 
 
 Live load in lbs. 
 
 Span in 
 
 per lineal ft. 
 
 ft. 
 
 12,000 
 
 100 
 
 5,500 
 
 125 
 
 5,000 
 
 150 
 
 4.750 
 
 175 
 
 4,500 
 
 200 
 
 4,000 
 
 250 
 
 3.500 
 
 3o0 
 
 3,250 
 
 350 
 
 3,000 
 
 400 
 
 Dead load in lbs 
 per lineal ft. 
 
 900 
 1135 
 1225 
 1300 
 1500 
 2000 
 2400 
 3000 
 4000 
 
 Live load in lbs. 
 per lineal ft. 
 
 2750 
 2600 
 2500 
 2500 
 2400 
 2400 
 2250 
 2250 
 2250 
 
"try 
 .Hast- 
 
 .ft. 
 
 a 
 
 (I 
 
 a 
 u 
 
 lbs, 
 t. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 Suspension Bridges. 
 
 (1). CahJcs. — The modern suspension bridge consists of two or more 
 cables, from whi^h the platform is suspended by iron or steel rods. The 
 cables pass over lofty supports (piers), u' d are secured to anchorages upon 
 which they exert a direct pull. 
 
 Chain, or link cables are the most common in England and Europe, 
 and consist of iron or steel links set on edge and pinned together. Formerly 
 the links were made by welding the heads to a flat liar, hut they are now 
 invariably rolled in one piece, and the proportional dimensions of the 
 head, which in the old bridges are very imperfect, have been much im- 
 proved. 
 
 Hoop-iron cahh,. have been used in a few cases, but the practice is 
 now abandoned, on account of the diifieulty attending the manufacture 
 of endless hoop-iron. 
 
 Win -rope cablis are the most common in America, and form the 
 strongest ties in proportion to their weight. They consist of a number 
 of parallel wire-ropes or strands, compactly bound together in a cylin- 
 drical bundle by a wire wound round the outside. There are usually 
 seven strands, one forming a core round which are placed the remain- 
 ing six. It was found impossible to employ a serm-strnud cable in the 
 construction of the East River Bridge, a.« tht; individual strands would 
 have been far too bulky to manipulate. The same objection held against 
 a thirteen-strand cable (13 is the next number giving an approximately 
 cylindrical shape), and it was finally decided to make the cable with 
 nineteen strands. Seven of these are pressed together so as to form a 
 centre core around which are placed the remaining twelve, the whole 
 being continuously wrapped with wire. 
 
 In laying up a cable great care is required to distribute the tension 
 uniformly amongst the wires. This may be effected either by giving 
 each wire the same deflection or by using .s7ra/(j|/t^ wire, i.e., wire which 
 when unrolled upon the floor from a coil remains straight, and shows no 
 tendency to spring back. The distribution of stress is practically uniform 
 in untwisted wire ropes. Such ropes are spun from the wires and strands 
 without giving any twist to individual wires. 
 
76 
 
 ANCHORAGE, ANCHORAGE CHAINS, SADDLES. 
 
 The htchstay is the portion of the cable extending from an anchoraj^e 
 to the nearest pier. 
 
 The elevation of the cables should be sufTioient to allow for settling, 
 wliich chiefly arises from the deflection due to the load and from changes 
 of temperature. 
 
 The cables may be prot<!cted from atmospheric influence by giving 
 them a thorough coating of paint, oil or varnish, but wherever they are 
 subject to saline influence, zii-.o seem.stobe the only certain safe-guard. 
 
 (2). Anchorage, anchorage chains, sadffhs. 
 
 The ancl.ovage, or abutment, is a heavy mass of masonry or natural 
 rock to which the end of a cable is made fast, and which resists by its 
 dead weight the pull upon the cable. 
 
 The cable traverses the anchorage, as in Figs. 1 , 2 and 3, passes through 
 a strong, heavy, cast-iron anchor plate, and. if made of wire-rope, has 
 its end effectively secured by turning it round a dead-eye and splicing it 
 to itself. Much care, however, is required to prevent a wire-rope cable 
 from rusting on account of the great extxint of its surface, and it is con- 
 sidered advisable that the wire portion of the cable should always ter- 
 minate at the entrance to the anchorage and there be attached to a 
 massive chain of bars, which is continued to the anchor plate or plates 
 and secured by bolts, wedges, or keys. 
 
 In order to reduce as much as possible the depth to which it is neces- 
 sary to sink the anchor plates, the anchor chains are frequently curved 
 as in Fig. 3. This gives rise to a force in a direction shewn by the 
 arrows, and the masonry in the part of the abutment subjccU^d to such 
 force should be laid with its beds perpendicular to the line of thrust. 
 
 The anchor chains are made of compound links consisting alternately 
 of an odd and even number of bars. The friction of the link-heads on 
 the knuckle plates lessens to a considerable extent the stress in a chain, 
 and it is therefore usual to dimini.sh its sectional area gradually from the 
 entrance E to the anchor. This is effected iu the Niagara Suspcusiou 
 
SUSPENDERS. 
 
 77 
 
 Brldfje by varyin<r the K'ction of the bars, and in the East River bridge 
 by varyinjjboth tlie scetion and tin; number (if'the bars. 
 
 The neecssity fit' presirvinu- the anelior ehains frnni rust is of'sueh im- 
 portance, that many entrineers consider it most essential that tlie passages 
 and channels containing the chains and i'astcnings should be accessible 
 for periodical examination, painting and npairs. This is unnecessary 
 if the chains are lirst eluniically elea.i-tl and then cuibcddrd in godd 
 hydraulic cement, as they will thus be perfectly jirotectid from all atmos- 
 pheric influence. 
 
 'I'lie direction of an anclior chain is changed by means of a saddle or 
 knuckle plate, which should be capable of sliding to an extent sufficient 
 to allow for the exjiansion and contraction of the chain. This may be 
 accomplished without the aid of rollers by bedding the saddle upon a 4 or 
 5-in. thickness of asphalted felt. 
 
 'file chain, where it passes over the 
 piers, rests on saddles, the object of I 
 which is to furnish bearings with easy 
 vertical curve-s. Either tht' saddle may ! 
 be constructed as in Fig. 4, so as to | 
 allow the cable to slip over it with comparatively little friction, or the 
 cliain may be secured to the saddle and the saddle supported ujmhi rollers 
 which work over a perfectly true and horizontal bed formed by a saddle- 
 plate fixed to the pier. 
 
 (3). Siispi'ii(/<rs. — The suspenders are the vertical or inclined rods 
 ■which carry the platform. 
 
 In Fig. f). the suspender rests in the groove of a cast-iron yoke which 
 straddles the cable. Fig. ») shews the suspender bolted to a wrought- 
 iron or steel ring which embraces tlic cable. When there are more than 
 two cables in the same vertical plane, various methods are adopted to 
 ensure the uniforni distribution of the load amongst the set. In Fig. 7, 
 for example, the suspender is fastened to the centre of a small wrought- 
 
78 
 
 CrUVE OF CABLE ; VERTICAL SUSPENDERS. 
 
 iron lever PQ, and the ends of the lever are connected with the cables by 
 the equally sstrainod rods PR and QS. In the Chelsea bridge, the dis- 
 tribution is made by means of an irregularly shaped plate (Fig. 8), one 
 angle (if which is supported by a joint pin, while a pin also passes through 
 another angle and rests upon one of the chains. 
 
 The suspenders carry the ends of the cross-girders (floor-beams), and 
 are spaced from 5 to 20-ft. apart. They should be provided with wrought- 
 iron screw-boxes for purposes of adjustment. 
 
 (4). — Ciiriw of Cable; vertical suHpenders. — An arbitrarily loaded 
 flexible cable takes the shape of one of the catenaries, but the trii<' cate- 
 nary is the curve in which a cable of uniform section and material hangs 
 under its own weight only. If the load is uniformly distributed per 
 horizontal unit of length, the cable forms a parabola. In most examples 
 of suspension bridges the load is supported by rods from a certain num- 
 ber of points along each cable, and its distribution may be assumed to 
 be approximately uniform per horizontal unit of length. Hence, the 
 curve usually adopted for the cables of a suspensiivi bridge is a parabnla • 
 
 Let Obe the lowest point of the cable AOB passing over piers at .1 
 and J3. 
 
 JiCt the load supported from the cable by vertical rods be w j^er hori- 
 zontal unit of length. 
 
 Let X ;i be the coordinates of any point /' of the cable with respect to 
 the horizontal OX a'ld the vertical 6'Fas axes of x and //, respectively. 
 
 Let ^ be the inclir ation of the tangent at iF*to the horizontal. 
 
 The portion 0/*of the cable is kept in equilibrium by the horizontal 
 pull //at 0, by the tangential pull 7' at /*, and by the load wx upon OP 
 which acts vertically through the middle point E of OX, /W being the 
 ordinate at P. 
 
 Hence, the tangint at P must also pass through E, and PEX is a 
 triangle of forces. 
 
 X 
 ~9~ 
 
 JJ_^^ ,2.//" 
 
 XC X 1/ ' w ' ' 
 
 0) 
 
 '■ti'Mm^^- 
 
PARAMETER, &C. 
 
 79 
 
 the equation to a parabola with its vertex at 0, its axis vertical, and its 
 
 2 // 
 parameter equal to — — * 
 
 w 
 
 , . T PE 1 
 
 ^^''""^ rr EN- 7^^ ■■■J^-=T.coso, ^^^^ 
 
 and the horizontal pull at every point of the cable is the same as that at 
 the lowest point. 
 
 T PE V/+ ; 
 
 Also,- 
 
 W.X PJ\ 
 
 y 
 
 (3) 
 
 or, T=u\x. V 1 + — — 
 
 4 >/- 
 
 (5). —Parameter, (f-c— Let /j„ /(,. be the elevations of A and B, re 
 spcctively, above the horizontal line COl). 
 
 Let OD rrz o„ 0C= oTjj, and let ((, + o.^ = u = CD. 
 
 by equation (1), a\= ""./(„ and a;^= '^~ .h. 
 
 w 
 
 But a, -f- a.^ — a, 
 
 The Parameter = 
 
 
 (-t) 
 
 «.V/'i 
 
 (t.'^h. 
 
 = -= , and (f.^ -- 
 
 2 //^ «r <r 
 
 Let ^„ #^, be the values of'^at .1 and B, respectively. 
 
 .-. fan 0, = 2.^T/Ii±^, and tan 6.^ = 2.VT,^^+^'^~ C^) 
 
 (5) 
 (7) 
 
 CoroUari/. — If /(, = h.. = /;, .-. „, = f/^= - . 
 
 the parameter^—, by equation (G), 
 4./( 
 
 (10) 
 
 and tan f^-tan '^,,= -— , by equation (8). 
 (6). — Pressure upon jners, dr. 
 Let r, be the tension in the main cable at .1 
 '* T' " " backstay " 
 
 " ''' be the inclination to the horizontal of the tangent to the back 
 stay at A. 
 
80 
 
 LENGTH OF ARC OF CABLE. 
 
 The total vertical pressure upon the pier = 7\.sin ^, + T'.ainif — P 
 The resultant horizontal force at ^l - 7', roa fl, - 7". con ii' = Q 
 When the cable slide.s over .smooth rnunded saddles (Fi^. 4), the 
 tensions T^ and T' are approximately the same; 
 
 .-. F=-- 1\. (sin 0^ + sin ()'), and Q= 7\.{cofi «, - cos tl'). 
 In order that the rcsulttint pressure upon the pier may be wholly ver- 
 tical (^ must be zero, or 0\ = ()', and the corresponding pressure is, 
 
 F=i2.1\.si)t,i\ 
 Again, the resultant pressure may be 
 made to act vertically, by securing the 
 cable to a saddle wliich is free to move 
 horizontally on the top of the pier, 
 (Fig. 10). 
 
 In this case, T,.c.nsO,= T\ cos^y .=^ H 
 and .•. P- II. {tan l\ + tan ft'). 
 
 Su])p(ise the friction at the saddle too great to be disregarded. 
 
 Let I) be tlie total height of the pier, and 
 let \y be its weight. 
 
 Let FG he tliu base of the pier, and A' the 
 limiting position of the centre of pressure. 
 
 Let /;, (/ be the distance of P and 11', re- 
 spectively, from K; 
 
 .". ftr sftdx'lifi/ fif position, Q '^ —d. '1' \ 
 
 and for stdhiliti/ of frirtion when the pier is! 
 of urasonry. p — r.-._i the co-efficient of friction. 
 
 The piers are made of timber, iron, steel, or masonry, and allow of 
 great scope in architectural design. 
 
 The cable should in no case be rigidly attached to the pier, unless the 
 lower Olid of the latter is free to revolve through a small angle about a 
 horizontal axis. 
 
 (7). — LiiKjth of arc of cable. — Let OP = s. 
 tan 6= -jr-, by equation (7), 
 
 .'.scc\n.d0 = J .,Jx = ^.Js.cos 
 
 or ds=: 
 
 II do 
 
 w cosO 
 
WEIGHT OF CABLE. 
 
 81 
 
 Hence, s= . / — 5—= -r — .\tane. secd + logJtanG \-secd)\ (11) 
 
 w J cos 2.W ' ^ / > V / 
 
 Again, fail 0: 
 
 w 
 
 .X, and sec 6 
 
 =v 
 
 1 + -^.x' 
 
 CoroUuri/. — The length of any arc of the parabola measured from 
 i8 approximately the same as that of the osculatory circle at measured 
 from and having the same abscissa. 
 
 Let R be the radius of this circle. 
 
 R= 
 
 Parameter x* 
 
 2 
 
 2.3/ 
 
 "^^^= b-'(^)y= (^ + -7eO* = ^ + ^- approximately. 
 
 -.x + 
 
 X 
 
 H./e*" 
 
 2 y^ 
 --X + - . •— 
 
 O X 
 
 (13) 
 
 (8\ — Weight of Cable. — The ultimate tenacity of iron wire is 90,000 
 lbs. per sq. in , while that of steel rises to 160,000-lbs, and even more. 
 The strength and gauge of cable wire may be ensured by specifying that 
 the wire is to have a certain ultimate teracity and elastic limit, and that 
 a given number of lineal ft. of the wire is to wpigh o?ic pound. Each of 
 the wires for the cables of the East River bridge was to have an ultimate 
 tenacity of 3,400-lbs., an elastic limit of 1600-lbs., aad 14 lineal ft. of 
 the wire were to weigh oiie pound. A very uniform wire, having a co- 
 efficient of elasticity of 29,000,000-lbs., has been the result, and the 
 process of straightening has raised the ultimate tenacity and elastic 
 limit nearly 8 per cent. 
 
 Let W be the weight of a length ^i (^ = 0D) of a cable of sufficient 
 sectional area to bear safely the horizontal tension //. 
 
 Let W2 be the weight of the length s, (=0-4) of the cable of a sec- 
 tional area sufficient to bear safely the tension T^ at A. 
 
 Let/ be the safe inch stress. 
 
 Let p be the specific weight of the cable material. 
 
 Wy= —.(ii-p, and W.i= — '—, — '-^i-P 
 
 f 
 
 f 
 
 ^^\^ ir,.-^.sec< 
 
 :0 = _±.( a, + -.-')( l+—-i + ...) 
 
 or Tf,= >r,(l+|^i-), nearly, 
 
 6 
 
 (14) 
 
82 
 
 DEFLECTION OF CABLE. 
 
 A saving may be effected by proportioning any given section to the 
 
 pull across that section. 
 
 At any point («,//), the pull=//. sec0, and the corresponding sec- 
 
 , Jf.secff ^, . , .^11 Il.sccd , , 
 
 tional area= — ;; — . 1 he weight per unit oi lcngth= -, — .p, and the 
 
 total weight of the length s, (^=0A) is, 
 
 / 
 
 W. 
 
 / U.secB ds H.p/ ,., H.p I {. 2.y 
 
 ^....y.^ 
 
 Butx'-T^.y 
 
 
 .■.F.=f!./-(U2.|.^....):..=f<(..i.'^),nea., 
 
 4 Ai 
 
 Hence, W^=^^-(} + ^^ 
 
 The weight of a cubic inch of steel averages .283-lb. 
 " " wrought iron " .277-lb. 
 
 The volume in inches of the cable of weight Tr, = 12.a,. 
 
 (15; 
 
 
 IV' 
 
 .', ^— 77=. 283-lb. or .277-lb., according as the cable is made of 
 
 12. a,.:^ 
 
 f 
 steel or iron. 
 
 Let the safe inch-stress of steel be taken at 33,960-lbs., of the best 
 cable-iron at 14,958-lbs., and of the best chain-links at 9,972-lbs. 
 
 •'• ^^=^' «'• ^^ ■'-^'^''3im= i^m ^'' ''''^ ''^^''' 
 
 r,=JT,«,x.277x 
 W,=ff.a,x.277x 
 
 12 
 
 14,958 "" 4,500 
 
 for iron cables. 
 
 12 
 
 H.a, 
 
 , for link cables. 
 
 (16) 
 (17) 
 (18) 
 
 9,972 3,000' 
 
 Note. — About |^th may be added to the net weight of a chain cable 
 for eyes and fastenings. 
 
 (9). — Deflection of a cable due to an elementary change in its length. 
 
 By the Corollary of § (7), the total length (S) of the cable AGB is, 
 
 2 hi 2 hi 
 
 Now a, and a,, are constant; A, - /i, is also constant, and .'.dhi^dh.^. 
 
 Hence, dS=t(^-^+^'A.dh, 
 6' \a. a J 
 
_^__. ■ k 
 
 Cl'ltVK OF CABI.K. 
 
 If /,,Z=/,,= /i. 
 
 (i,~(i.,= 
 
 10 /. 
 
 and (/aS'=^ o • ~- <^^* 
 
 (V.)) 
 
 rosp 
 
 Draw tlu! ordinate /■'.V, and let the tangent at y-* uijct (J.X in JJ. 
 As before, I*.VE is a triangh' of forces, and ^is the middle point of 
 ON. 
 
 •" - (20) 
 
 
 the cquatiotj to a [larabola with its axis paralKl to OY, and its focus at 
 a point aS' where 4. <SV> ^ "" , ■ 
 
 CurnUir\j 1.— L't tlie axi'. meet the tangent at in 7", and h't its 
 inclination to OX be ('. 
 
 Let .1 be the vertex, and ON' a perpendicular to the axis. 
 .•..SY>=,S'7"=*SM 4- AT'z=ii\ 4- AN' 
 
 But, \.AS.A N'=ON"=N'T'\ tan^l =\. AS \ Vurl 
 
 \ S 
 ■ AS:=AN'. tat^i and SO- AS. (1 + C»t'i)= -,~Tv 
 
 Hence, the parameter =4. AS=i. SO. .sin'l. (21) 
 
 Corollari/2. — Let F be the obli({ueload upon tlie cable between &i F 
 '• Q " " total thrust upon the plarform at E. 
 " w " '* load per horizontal unit of length. 
 '• q " " rate of increase of thrust along platform. 
 '' t " " length of i'i;. 
 
 w 
 
 w '= - — -I and q=-w. cot i 
 sin I ^ 
 
 (22) 
 
84 
 
 SUSPENSION BRIDGE LOADS. 
 
 ' -» 
 
 )/• ,r 
 
 -' // 
 
 H=",:L=2>r'.SO=2AS. 
 2.( w'.f.x 
 
 sin^i 
 
 =2. A S. -."-.- (23) 
 
 r=iir^'= " •'- (24) 
 
 .c // 
 
 f=,r + ^ + x.t/.Cosi (25) 
 
 CnroUiin/ 3.— Let s ha the lengtli of ()l\ and let f) bo the inclination 
 
 .'.s=Ar—AO 
 
 - ^•^^'l'l[tan (90-/?) ..wc (90-/0 t- Ai(7,.('"» 90^ + s^>c. 9(rr«) 
 2.W L 
 
 -tnn (90-0.«''C (90-(")-/o(;, ( ^ni !KM + scr 0(Pi) | 
 
 — , Acot iKcosec H — cot i.oscr I -^ dx]. , 
 
 (20) 
 
 It may b.' (>iisily shown as in tlio Cornllary of v^(7) that aj)proxiuiatoly, 
 
 •> .y-. ^Z//- '• ^27) 
 
 ,s=:.l' + y.<'".s' * H — .- 
 3 .'• 
 
 //. ''ON i 
 
 (11). — Siisjuuninii hriilijc lodds. — Tho heaviest distributtMl load to 
 which a hiLihway bridire may be subject'd is that due to a dense crowd 
 of people, and is fixed by modern French practice at S2-lbs. per sq. ft. 
 Probably, however, it is unsafe to estimate tlie loud at less than iVoni 
 100 to 140-lbs. per s(|. ft., while allowance has also to be made for the 
 concentration upon a single wheel of as nnich as HO.OOO-lbs., and per- 
 haps more. 
 
 A procession marching in step across a suspension bridge may strain 
 it far more intensely than a dead load, and will wt up a synchronous 
 vibration which may prove absolutely dangerous. 
 
 The fucfor of sa/ctj/ for tlie dead load of a suspension bridge should 
 not be less than 2^ or 3, and for the live load it is advisable to make it 
 6. With respect to this point it uuiy be remarked that the efficiency 
 of a cable does not depjnd so niueh u[)oii its ultimate strength as 
 upon its limit (>f elasticity, and .so long as the latter is not exceeded the 
 cable remains uninjured. For example, the hnak'ng weujht of one of 
 the 15-inch cables of the East River Bridge is estimated to be 12,000 
 tons, its limit of elasticity being 8,118-tons, so that with H only as a 
 factor of safety, the stress would still fall below the ela.stic limit and 
 
MODIFICATIONS OK TIIK SIMPLE RUSPKNSION lUIIDOE. 
 
 8.') 
 
 ,1 
 it 
 
 us 
 
 •:> 
 
 liiive no iiijuriouH lifft-ct. Tlio riDitlinui/ applieation of such ii loail 
 would doubtlt'SH iiltiiiiatcly K-ad to thi; dostria'tioii of the bridiio. 
 
 The dip of tho cable of a suspoii.sioii hridLTC ttsiiully varies fi-oiu 
 l-15th to 1-I2th of the span, and i.^ rarely as much as much as 1-lOth, 
 except for small spans. 
 
 (12). — Minlljifiifiotis of the simple sitxprusioii hr!ihji\ — 
 The disadvantages connected with suspension bridt,'es are very <;reat. 
 The po.sition of the platform is restrieted. massive anclioraijes and 
 })iers are jrenerally re(|uired. and any change in the distribution of the 
 load produces a sensible deformation in the struct\ire. Owinir to the 
 want of rigidity, a considerable vertical and lutrizontal oscillatory 
 motion may be caused, and many efforts have been made to modify the 
 bridge in .such a manner as to neutralize the tendency to oscillation. 
 
 (a). - The simplest, 
 improvement >s that 
 shewn in Fig. 13, 
 where the point of the 
 cable mo.st liable toi 
 deformation is attach- 
 ed to tlu' piers by short 
 straight chains A B. 
 
 (b). - A series of in- 
 clined stays, or iron! 
 ropes, radiating from 
 the pier saddles, niay 
 be made to support the 
 platform at a number 
 of equidistant points, 
 (Fig. 14.) Such ropes were used in the Niagara Britlge, and still more 
 recently in the East River Bridge. The lower ends of the ropes are 
 generally made fast to the top or bottom chord of the briilge truss, so 
 that the corresponding chord stress is increased and the neutral axis 
 proportionati'ly displaced. To remedy this, it has been proposed to 
 connect the rojH?s with a horizontal tie coincident in position with the 
 neutral axis. Again, the cables of the Niagara and East Kiver bridges 
 do not hang in vertical planes, but are inclined inwards, the distance 
 between them being greatest at the j)iers and least at the centre ot the 
 span. This draicing in adds greatly to the lateral stability, which may 
 be still further increased by a series of horizontal ties. 
 
IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 10 ^ 
 
 I.I 
 
 1.25 
 
 IIM 112.5 
 
 I: iiS 
 
 1.4 
 
 liiiU 
 
 II 2.0 
 
 1.6 
 
 % 
 
 ^3 
 
 ^" 
 
 /J 
 
 c^. 
 
 (Tl 
 
 
 ^'/ ^'^# 
 
 :^ > 
 
 V 
 
Qx 
 
 w- 
 
 \ 
 
86 
 
 MODIFICATIONS OF THE SMPLE SUSPENSION BRIDGE. 
 
 (c). -In F'v^. 15 two 
 CJibles in the f^anio ver- 
 tical [tlane are diagonal 
 ly braced t<tgether. In 
 principli' this method i- 
 similar to that adopted 
 in the sfijfrniiig truss, 
 (discussed in § IJJ), but is probably less efficient on account of the 
 flexible cliaraeter of the cables, althouLrh a slight economy of mattjrial 
 might doubtless bo realized. The braces act both as struts and ties, 
 and the stresses to which they are subjected may be easily calculated. 
 
 (<0.-In Fig. Itj a sin- 
 gle chain is diagonally 
 braced to the platform . 
 The weight of the bridge 
 must be sufficient to en- 
 sure tliat no suspender will 
 be rubjected t. a thrust, or' 
 the efficiency of the arrangement is destroyed. An objection to this as 
 well as to the preceding method is that the variation in tlie curvature of 
 the chain under changes of temperature tends to Ioc^-mi and strain the 
 joints. 
 
 The Drinciple has 
 been adopted with 
 greater prefection i n 
 the construction of a 
 foot-bridge at Frank- 
 fort. The girder is 
 cut at the centre, the 
 chain is hinged, and the rigidity is obtained by means of vertical and 
 inclined braces which act both as struts and ties (Fig. 17.) 
 
 (O.-In Fig. 18, the I 
 girder is supjiorted at sev- 
 eral points hy straight! 
 chains running directly to 
 the pier saddles, and the 
 chains are kept in place by 
 being hung from a curved chain by vertical rods. 
 
 (/).-It has been proposed to employ a stiff inverted arched rib of 
 
AUXILIAKY OR STIFFENING TRUSS, 
 
 87 
 
 ical and 
 
 nrought-iron instead of the flexible cable. All straining action may be 
 eliminated by hinging the rib at the centre and piers, and the theory 
 of the stresses developed in this tension rib is precisely similar to that 
 of the arched rib, except that the stresses are reversed in kind. 
 
 (g). — The platform of every suspension bridge should be braced hori- 
 zontally. The floor beams are sometimes laid on the skew in order that 
 the two ends of a beam might be suspended from points which do not 
 oscillate '^oncordantly, and also to distribute the load over a greater 
 length of cable. 
 
 (13). — Auxiliary or\ 
 stiffening truss. — The 
 object of a stifi'ening 
 truss (Fig. 19) is to 
 distribute a passing load 
 over the cable in such a 
 manner that it cannot be distorted. The pull upon each suspender 
 must therefore be the same, and this virtually assumes that the effect 
 of the extensibility of the cable and suspenders upon the figure of the 
 stiffening truss may be disregarded. 
 
 The ends and A must be anchored, or held down by pins, but 
 should be free to move horizontally. 
 
 Let there be n suspenders, and let T be the pull upon each, 
 
 . ^ I T 
 
 :. t, the mtensity of the pull per unit of span = T-^ r = n + 1 -y 
 
 I being the spa,n. 
 
 Let w be the uniform intensity of the dead load. 
 
 Let R■^, i?2 , be the reactions at and A, respectively. 
 
 Case I. — Th'; bridge partially loaded. 
 
 Let w' be the greatest uniform intensity of the live load, and let it 
 advance from A, and cover a length AB. 
 
 Let OB=x 
 
 For equilibrium, 
 
 R, + R^ + (^ - «'). I -^''- G - x)=0 (1) 
 
 &nd,R^.l + l~^.P-'^.{l-.xy = 
 
 (2) 
 
 Also, since the whole of the weight is to be transmitted through the 
 suspenders, (<-«?).? — ?«'".(?- x)=0 
 
 to 
 
 or, t~ic =—.(l-x) 
 
 (3) 
 
Wsl 
 
 88 
 
 AUXILIARY OR STIFFENING TRUSS. 
 
 From equations (1), (2), and (3), 
 
 -R,=^.j.(l-x)=.R, 
 
 (4) 
 
 which shews that the reactions at and A are equal in magnitude but 
 
 opposite in kind. They are evidently greatest when x=-, i.e., when 
 
 w'.l 
 the live load covers half the bridge, and the common value is then -— 
 
 o 
 
 The shearing force at any point hetioeen and B distant x' from 0, 
 =R, + {t- w).x'r=w'!-^. (x' - -|) (5) 
 
 which becomes —.-.(I- x)=.-R^=Ri, \s'hen x' equal x. Thus, the shear 
 
 at the head of the live load is equal in magnitude to the reaction at each 
 end, and is an absolute maximum when the live load covers half the 
 bridge. The web of the truss must therefore be designed to bear a 
 
 shear of 
 
 w'.l 
 8 
 
 at the centre and ends. 
 
 Again, the bending moment at any point between and B, distant 
 x' from 0, 
 
 =i?,x'+i:^> =|'.^il.(^'^_,,.x'), (6) 
 
 which is greatest when x'= „, i.e., at the centre of OB, its value then 
 
 w Z — cc 
 being — ^. — — , x^ Thus, the bending moment is an absolute maxi- 
 
 mum when , Cl.x^ - x^") = 0, i.e., when x = ^.l, and its value is then 
 dx X ; ^ ^ 
 
 w 
 54" 
 
 V 
 
 The bending moment at any point between B and A distant x' from (?, 
 
 =/?l.x + —^ .X " - — .(x - x)* =. -r-. .-.X - x.l - x' 
 
 (7) 
 
 d 
 
 l + x 
 
 which is greatest when — -, (x' -x. Z-x')=0, i.e., when .x'=— ^, or at 
 
 dx: 
 
 w x 
 
 the centre of AB, its value then being q-.j-.(^ - x)*. Thus, the bend- 
 
 ing moment is an absolute maximum when (x.l - x ) = 0, i.e., when 
 
 dx 
 
 X = _, and its value is then + — P. 
 3' 54 
 
AUXILIARY OR STIFFENING TRUSS. 
 
 89 
 
 ! 
 
 
 Hence, the maximum bending moments of the unloaded and loaded 
 divisions of the truss are equal in viagnitude hut opposite in direction, 
 and occur at the points of trisection ( D, C) of OA, when Ihe live load 
 covers oners one-third (AC ) and tuw-thirds (AD) 0/ the bridge, respec- 
 tively. 
 
 Each chord must evidently be designed to resist both tension and 
 compression, and in order to avoid unnecessary nicety of calcuhition, the 
 section of the truss may be kept uniform throughout the middle half of 
 its length. 
 
 In order that the truss 
 might act most efficiently, 
 it should be made in two 
 halves, (Fig. 20), con- 
 nected at the centre by a 
 bolt strong enough to re- 
 
 sist the shear of 
 
 u/.l 
 
 The trusses can then deflect freely and are not 
 
 sensibly strained by a rise or fall of the cable under a change of tem- 
 perature. 
 
 Case II. — A single concentrated load W at an 1/ point B 0/ the truss. 
 W now takes the place of the live load of intensity w'. 
 
 The remainder of the notation and the method of procedure being 
 precisely the same as before, the corresponding equations are, 
 
 Jii + Jii + {t-w).l- W={) (1') 
 
 ^-^.P-W(l-x)=0 (2') 
 
 RJ + 
 
 P- W(l-x)=0 
 W 
 
 t-^w= 
 
 I 
 
 -^=f(-4)=^' 
 
 (3') 
 
 (4') 
 
 which shews that the reactions at and A are equal in magnitude but 
 opposite in kind. They are greatest when x— and when x=l, i e., 
 
 W 
 
 when W is either at or at A, and the common value is then 
 
 2 
 
 The shearing force at any point between and B distant x' from 0, 
 =R, + {t-w).x'=^.(x'-x+^-y (5') 
 
 W 
 which is a maximum when x' = x, and its value is then -^' 
 
90 
 
 AUXILIARY OR STIFFENING TRUSS. 
 
 w 
 
 The web must theicftire be desijiiicd to bear a shear of throui^hout 
 
 the whole leriL:th f)f the truss. 
 
 Ajraiii. the bendinj; moment at any p(»int hifirccii (ind B distant x' 
 from O, 
 
 First le x< -• The bondinir moment is positive and is a maximum 
 when x'=x, its value then being +-—- (?.x — x^j. 
 
 iVcx/ let x>-^. The bending moment is then negative and is a maxi- 
 
 ^ • , t- ,. . "' / /\' 
 
 mum when x =x — -— , its value then being - • / x - -y ) . 
 
 The bending moment at any point hetwecn B and A distance x' from 
 
 = .S,.x' -. (< - ,.)/^ - ir.(x' - x)= -.(x' - ( ;^- - ^^ (7') 
 
 which is a maximum when -, i x'- ^Y o- - -^ ) [ =0, /.f-., when 
 
 2 . W / l\^ 
 
 — , and its value is then — 5— •( a; — :, ) . 
 
 X =eX + 
 
 Ahte. — The stiffening truss is most effective in its action, but adds 
 considerably to the weight and cost of the whole structure. Provision 
 has to be made both for the extra truss and for the extra material re- 
 quired in the cable to carry this extra load. 
 
CHAPTER y. 
 
 A R C II K D K I B S . 
 
 (1). — Lincdr arrhcs. — When a cord han^rs from two points of sup- 
 port, and is loaded with a iiunibcr of weights, it tends to assume the 
 form of a /iinini/iir, or vquiUhriinn polyfron, and the horizontal pull 
 at every point of the cord is the same, (^ (3). Chap. I). 
 
 Let and .1 l)e the two 
 points of support in the same 
 horizontal plane. 
 
 Let ./•. ij, be the co-ordin- 
 ates of any point Q of the 
 cord witli respect to 0. 
 
 Let P be the resultant of 
 the weights bt'tween and Q. 
 
 Let X, bo the horizontal distance of /'from Q. 
 
 Let Fand //, respectively, be the vertical aud horizontal components 
 of the resultant force at 0. 
 Take moments about Q. 
 
 ILy-V.x + P.x, (1) 
 
 Suppose the cord to be exactly invcrtal and to be stayed in such a 
 manner that it retains its form unchanged. Also, let the weights be the 
 same in magnitude and distribution. The stresses at different points of 
 the cord are now reversed in /^lud but not in mapnitude, and equation 
 (1) becomes, 
 
 n.,/=V.x ~ P.x.^M (2) 
 
 M being the bending moment at a distance x from \n sl horizontiil 
 girder of the same span and similarly loaded. 
 
 But JI is constant and .'. // oc M. 
 
 'Tence, the vertical ordinate^ at points of the inverted cord measured 
 from the horizontal axis A are proportional to the bending moments 
 for corresponding sectioits (fa girder of the same span and similarly 
 loaded. 
 
92 
 
 ARCHED RIBS. 
 
 If the numbei" of the weights is increased indefinitely, and the 
 distance between the points of application indefinit<.'ly diminished, the 
 inverted cord becomes a curve, and forms a lincur arch, or cquilUrrated 
 rib. 
 
 An infinite number of linear arches, or curves of equilibrium, may be 
 drawn through the points of support, as they are n.erely the bending 
 moment curve plotted to different scales. These arches transmit a 
 thrust only, and can never be constructed in practice, as the equilibrium 
 is destroyed by the slightest variation in the distribution of the load 
 from that for which the arch is designed, but the principles upon which 
 they depend may be applied in the dt. termination of the lines <>/ resist- 
 ance for arches and arched ribs. 
 
 Corollitry 1. — If 7/ be unity, the ordinates (j/) are ecjuul to the bend- 
 
 ing moments. 
 
 Corolhry 2. — The linear arch for a load uniformly distributed along 
 the horizontal is 2i, parabola, (§ (4), Chap. IV). 
 
 (2). — Arched Ribs. — An arched rib is any truss in which both the 
 chords are concave or convex in a vertical plane, and which gives rise to 
 oblique reactions at the supports. 
 
 Arches and suspension bridges are the two extremes in which the 
 horizontal stresses developed by the load are met by horizontal forces 
 applied at the points of support, instead of being made to neutralize each 
 other within the structure itself, and are therefore the only systems in 
 which the material should or might be subjected to the same kind of 
 stress throughout. 
 
 Wrought-iron and mild steel are very suitable for small arches in 
 which parts of the rib are liable to tensile tresses. Cast-iron and cast- 
 steel, having a greater compressive strength, might seem better adapted 
 to large spans, as they admit of greater economy, but they are ill-suited 
 to withstand shocks, and have been almost entirely superseded by the 
 more elastic materials. 
 
 The rib may consist of a number of tubes bolted together, as in the 
 St. Louis steel bridge, but is usually of an /-section. The depth of the 
 rib is not necessarily uniform from end to end, but may be advantageously 
 increased in parts subjected to an excessive bending action. 
 
 The space between the roadway and rib, i.e., the spandril, may be 
 filled up with some kind of lattice work, which should be very carefully 
 designed, as the artistic appearance of the arch is largely dependent 
 thereon. 
 
ARCHED RIBS. 
 
 93 
 
 Generally, the ends of the rib are 
 securely bolt<!d to iron skcwbaeks built in- 
 to the abutments. It iss far preforublc to 
 support the ends on pins or on cylindrical 
 bearinjis, 
 
 Fij;. 
 
 2, which allow of a free 
 
 rotsitional movement at the sprin^injr.", 
 so that the straining action in fhosi' 
 parts due to chaiifres of temperature or 
 other causes are eliminated. Besides, the h<,rizontal thrust, which is 
 indeterminate when the ends are fixed, now becomes approximately 
 axial and determinate, and a consideration of the actual deformation of 
 different portions of the rib will render its strength completely ascertain- 
 able. Similar results have been ob'ained in roofs by .suspending the ribs 
 from single links attached to the supports. 
 
 The betiding action at any point of the rib may be made to vanish by 
 the intn»duetion of a hinge, and the lint ar arch mu^t pass through all 
 such points. With a live load, however, there cannot be more than 
 three hinges, or the equilibrium will be unstable and the arch will fail. 
 
 The practice of constructing timber arches with bent planks, bolted 
 and scarfe^l ,ether, is not to be recommended. When wood is em- 
 ployed, the a -hould bo a frame of which the several members are 
 straight bal'.s. 
 
 Timber arches are usually in the form of a .segment of a circle, and a 
 semi-circle is often employed for the sake of architectural appearance. 
 
 Fig. 3 represents a good 
 form of metal arch for mod- 
 erate spans, the chords bt^ing 
 braced together, so as to pre- 
 vent distortion. If the .^span 
 is Inrge, die depth of the rib 
 may bo increased and kept unitbrm throughout. The cliords uro then 
 parallel, and the necessity for long braces at the abutmencs is obviated. 
 
 A horizontal distributing girder introduced at the top of an arched 
 rib gives an increased depth, and is also intended to share the variable 
 stresses induced by a pa.ssing load, so that the maximum stress at anj 
 point of the rib may never exceed the greatest stress produced when the 
 bridge is completely covered by the passing load. Much uncertainty, 
 however, exists as to the mutual relation of the girder and rib and it 
 seems better to concentrate the additional metal in the rib. 
 
 < i 
 
94 
 
 GENERAL PUOrOSITION. 
 
 With a passing Utad the thrusts upon a pier supporting the onds of 
 adjacent arches in a viaduct are often unequal, and if the conditions of 
 stability will allow the pier to bear only a part of the resultant thrust, 
 the ri^mainder must be converted into an artificial thrust along tlu; via- 
 duct. 
 
 Note. -When the ends of a rib are hinged, // is indeterminate withiu 
 limits dependent upon the frictional bending moment at the bearings. 
 
 (!J). — General proposition. — It is now proposed to describe the uuthod 
 of calculating tlic /)>v>Ar(/j/« maximum stresses at the diiferent sections 
 of an arched rib. The stresses cannot be found with mathematical 
 accuracy, as they depend upon a variety of conditions which are altogether 
 indeterminate. 
 
 The total stress at any point is made up of a number of subsidiary 
 stresses, of which the most important are : (1) a direci thrust, (2; a stress 
 due to flexure, (3) a stress due to a change of temperature. Euoh of 
 these may be iiivo^stigated separately. 
 
 (4). — Bmclivg moment {M) at any jwint of an arched rth. 
 
 Let A B c, the axis of an 
 arched rib fiiiiged at the ends, 
 coincide with a linear arch for 
 a given load. The thrust at 
 any cross-section of the rib is 
 necessarily axial and uniformly 
 distributed. 
 
 For a diflferent load the linear arch assumes a new form, as a d c, and 
 thf^ etrcBs is no longer axial. 
 
 Let V and //, respectively, be the vertical and horizontal components 
 of the thrust at A , 
 
 Let P, the resultant of the load between A and any ordinate n E F, 
 
 meet A c in G. 
 
 ''•M at E,= V.af-P.qf-ILef 
 
 But, = F. A p - P. a p - //. D p 
 
 .'. i/= /f ( DF - EF) = //. D E (1), 
 
 Hence, ihe bending moment at any point of the axis is proportional to 
 the vertical distance of that point from the linear arch. 
 The same is true if the ends of the rib are absolutely ^icec?. 
 Let Ml be the moment due to the fixture at A. 
 
 .". M= V. AP - P. GP - B. EP - Ml 
 
 & = F. AP - P. GP - //. DP - Ml 
 
 & M=H. DK, as befor3. (2). 
 
 I' y I 
 
RIB WITH HINOED ENDS. 
 
 95 
 
 iV is zero at II, the point of intersection of the axis and linear arch, and 
 is ncjrative, i.e., clianj^ca in direction, at points on the right of ll. 
 
 Corollary. — Let T be the thrust along the axis at E; draw d'e a nor- 
 mal at £. 
 
 .-. r=//.s^cDED' = //.^ 
 
 D E 
 
 and •'*M= ZT. D e= T. d'e 
 
 (5). Rih with hinged ends ; iuvnriability of span. 
 
 Let ABC bo the axis of a 
 rib supported at the ends on 
 pins or on cylindrical bear, 
 ings. The resultant thrusts 
 at A and c must necessarily 
 pass through the centres of 
 rotation. The vertical components of the thrusts are e(jual to the cor- 
 responding reactions at the ends of a girder of the same span and 
 similarly loaded ; H remains to be found. 
 
 Let ADC be a linear arch for any given distribution of 'he load, and 
 let it intersect the axis of the rib at ll. The curvature of the mor* 
 heavily loaded portion AEH will he flattened, while that of the remainder 
 will be sharpened. 
 
 The bending action at E tends to change the inclination of the rib 
 at that point, and if the end a were free to move, the line E/ would 
 take the position EL, al being of course very small ; draw the ver- 
 tical LO. 
 
 AO represents the horizontal displacement of the point E. 
 
 Since LAE is approximately a right-angle, 
 
 (1) 
 
 ,AO = AL. 
 
 AE 
 
 M 
 
 But the angle Ael = the change of curvature=-Tr-7 nearly, 
 /being the moment of inertia of the section of the rib at E. 
 
 .-. al_^,^ 
 and .'. A0 = - 
 
 AE, nearly, 
 M „ DE.EF 
 
 (2) 
 
 But the length AC is assumed to be invariable, so that the total dis- 
 placement between A and c is nil. 
 
 'Zr.DE.EP\ _ 
 
 (■ 
 
 E. I J 
 
96 
 
 VALUE OF II. 
 
 or, since 11 and E are constant, 
 
 L\ ■;!! 
 
 m 
 
 1 
 1!! 
 
 (i^)=o 
 
 C^) 
 
 The actual linear arch may now be ascertained by drawinj; several 
 linear arches and selecting the one which most nearly satisfies equation (3). 
 Corollary 1. — Equation (li) may be written, 
 
 /DP-EP\ /l»K. KK\ /EF'\ - ... 
 
 l(^— p-j.EF = 0,ors(— ^-j-2(-y)=0 (4) 
 
 Hence, the ordinates of the required arch may be directly calculated 
 from the bending moments at the several sections of a girder of equal 
 span and similarly loaded. 
 
 Corollary 2. — If the section of the rib is uniform, / is constant, and 
 equations (3) and (4) respectively become, 
 
 2. (de.ep) = and 2 (df.ep)-5; (ep*)— 
 
 Corollary 3. — Let the 
 axis of a rib of uniform 
 section of span / and rise k, 
 be a parabola, and lot a 
 single weight be placed up- 
 on the rib at a point of 
 which the horizontal dis- 
 tance from the centre of the span is x. 
 
 The linear arch now consists of the two straight lines da, do, and it 
 
 32 k P 
 is found, by applying the condition (4), that D P=— • - „'. ./ 
 
 O 0.' ^TC.X 
 
 Corollary 4. — If the axis of the rib is semi-circular, instead of a 
 
 Ml 
 parabola, it is found that dp is equal to . , i.e., is half the length of the 
 
 rib. 
 
 No linear arch, however, will even approximately coincide with the 
 axis of a rib rising vertically at the springings, so that a semi-circular 
 or semi-elliptical axis is not to be roconiniendcd. 
 
 (6). — Value of II. — Let 
 ADC be the actual linear arch 
 of a rib of which the axis is 
 ASC. 
 
 Let DP, the maximum or- 
 dinate of the arch,-=y 
 
 Let x, be the horizontal 
 distance from DP of P, the resultant of the load between A and dp. 
 
PROCESS OF DESIGNING A RIB. 
 
 97 
 
 Let AF = X 
 
 Take uiomonts about D, 
 
 v.x—p.x,=rr. 
 
 V and V", th 
 
 il 
 
 npoiicntfi of tlic thrusts at A and c, are 
 cfjual to tlio corresponding reactions at the ends of a fj;irdt'r of the eame 
 span and simihirly h".adod, Tho resultant thrusts at A aud C are there- 
 fore V V' + IP ^"'^ V Y'^ + II -, respectively. 
 
 Tho resultant thrust at any other point of the rib is now easily com- 
 puted, and is res,»lvahle into two coT»ij)onents, the one normal to tiie sec- 
 tion of the rib at the u;iven point and the other in tho plane of the section. 
 The latter i;ives rise to a shearing stress and the former (unless axial) 
 to a uniformly varying stress, 
 
 (7). — I'l'ofi'ss of ib'signing 
 a rih. — For a fixed distribu- 
 tion of the load the axis of the 
 rib should be mado to coin" 
 cide with a linear arch for that 
 load. 
 
 (generally, the rib lias to be designed to carry a live., in addition to a 
 deatf load, so that provision must be made for the stresses which may 
 arise from every possible distribution of the former. 
 
 Let MN be a numbi',r of equi-distant crosfl-^ections of a given rib. 
 Draw a linear arch for each of the following cases : — 
 
 (l).-When the live load covers the whole of the bridge. 
 
 (2),-When the live load covers the middle hal/ofiho bridge. 
 
 (3). -When the live load covers one-half of the bridge from one end. 
 
 (4). -When the live load covers three-fourths of the bridge from one end. 
 
 Calculate the flange stresses in the diflferent sections from the thrust in 
 the nearest of the four linear arches, and add or remove metal according as 
 the stress is excessive or falls below the safe limit. If the form of the rib 
 is much changed by this process, a second approximation must be made. 
 
 (8). — ]{ib with ends ah- 
 solutely fixed. — Let ABC be 
 the axis of tlie rib. The 
 fixture of the ends introduces 
 two unknown moments, and 
 since H is also unknown, 
 three conditions must be 
 satisfied before the strength 
 of the rib can be determined. 
 
98 
 
 RIB WITH ENDS ABSOLUTELY FIXED. 
 
 :t 
 
 The linear arch, as shewn by the dotted lines, may fall above or be- 
 low the points A and C ; draw any ordinate df. 
 
 Since the ends of the rib are absolutely fixed, the total change of in- 
 clination of the rib between A and o must be zero. 
 
 M 
 
 But the change of inclination at any point Eis ~, approximately. 
 
 ■■•'{in)='=<iu) 
 
 or,3.(";)=0 (1) 
 
 If the abutments are immovable the span A c is invariable; if they 
 yield, the total horizontal displacement between A and c may be found 
 by experiment ; iet \t=/'M. 
 
 :.hyp,i{^-^ )=0,or=f,M (2) 
 
 The total vertical displacement between A and c nmst also be zero 
 Referring to § 5 the vertical displacement of any point E is LO. 
 
 ButL0=AL.^=^^-^^-^-^*^-^^ 
 
 AE KI 
 ^DE.AP 
 
 A\I 
 
 • 2(^^) 
 
 
 
 (3) 
 
 Equations (1), (2) and (3), are the three equations of condition. 
 
 CoroUari/ 1. — Let the 
 axis of the rib be a parabola 
 of span I and rise k, and let 
 the section of the rib be uni- 
 form. 
 
 Let a single weight be 
 placed upon the rib at a 
 point of which the horizon- 
 tal distance from the centre of the span is x. The linear arch becomes 
 the two straight lines da', dc'. 
 
 Let aa'=^„Cc'=^j, and DP = y. 
 
 Condition (1) gives, 
 
 I . \ . /I \ 4, 
 
 y.i + (^ + ^) -yi + (^— ^) -y^ = g-'-^ 
 
 Condition (2) gives, 
 ^5 « .A y . /I 
 
 8 
 
 yii^-^y^ (^ + .).(^.?-x).y.., (,'-x).(^./.x).y.= «/c.i. 
 
les 
 
 EFFECT OF A CHANGE OF TEMPERATURE. 99 
 
 Condition (3) gives, 
 
 y-(|'-.r)./. (/ «) Q./-.).,, . (-;-.):,.=2./V. 
 
 Solving those three equations. 
 
 (i , 2 /+10..C, , 2 /-lO.r. ; 
 
 -^ f) "' 15 /+ 2,c '^- 15 l~l..c 
 
 (9). — /v/ftr^ of (I change of fimprrnfiirc. — The variation in the span 
 ?ofan arch for a change of f from the mean temperature is ± a.t.l, 
 approximately, a being the co-efficient of expansion. 
 
 Hence, if //, is the horizontal force (thrust or tension) induced by 
 the change of tenipi-rature, the condition that the length AC is invariable 
 is expressed by tiie e([uati(»n, 
 
 "'■K-irf) -"■'■'=' w 
 
 Cornllan/ 1. — Let a rib of uniform section of span I tud rise k be 
 hinged at the ends. Fig. G. The linear arch is the line A c, and equa- 
 tion (4) becomes. 
 
 The greatest bending action is at the crown, and is equal to I^^.k 
 Coi'olhirti 2. — If the axis of the rib in the previous Corollary is a 
 semi-circle, instead of a parabola, 
 
 .-. ^^'.2(EF-') -\-a.t.l=0=JL.l.P^,;,fJ 
 E.I "- ^ - E.l IG - 
 
 The greatest bending action is at the crown and is equal to //, - 
 
 CnroUdri/ )]. — Let the ends of 
 the rib in Corollary 1 be abso- 
 lutely iSxed. 
 
 The linear arch is a straight 
 line MN which miust satisfy con- 
 dition 1, in § 8. 
 
 .•. the areas ams and cnt are 
 together equal to the area SUT, 
 
 and .•. MA — NC = ^/r:. 
 3 
 
100 dp:fllction of an auchkd hiij. 
 
 Henco, equation (4) becomes, 
 
 ^ . l{ izv'-ik.-EF^-^ a.t.l=0 = 3. .( Ijr.l-'^ Jcr\ +<(.f.l 
 , jj _45 ,, jo.t. 
 
 The niaxiumin bondiu'c action= //,• -. A;= T — .K.I. -- 
 
 3 '1 k 
 
 Coral/dii/ -1. — The co-efficiont of expansion per (le^iTce of Fahren- 
 heit is .(J0()(HIG2 and .0(10001)7 for cast and wruuirht iron beuuis, res- 
 pectively. Hence, the corresponding total exj)an.si(in or contraction in a 
 length of 100 ft., for a range of GO" F. from the mean temperature is 
 
 .037J ft. ( = .-;*'') and .0402 ft.( = L'y 
 
 In practice the actual variation of length rarely exceed.s onehdf of 
 these amounts, which is chiefly owing to structural constraint. 
 
 (10^. — Drjlc-tion •>/ (1)1 
 orchid n'h. — Li t the abut- 
 ments be immovable. 
 
 Let AHC be the axis of the 
 rib in its normul ])nsition. 
 
 Let ADC represent the posi- 
 tion of the axis when the rib is loaded. 
 
 Let BDK be the ordinat.^ at the centre of the span ; join ah, ad. 
 
 ... I)F"-AD''- af'=.\ij-.( ) -af^ 
 
 \(trc. \Ji/ 
 
 But, 
 
 "/•C.AB-'/rr.AD 
 
 
 /being the intensity of stress due to the change in the length of the 
 axis. 
 
 .•.DF^=AB^ A-ZV- AF'=BF'''-An^ | 2. -^ -J lY ] 
 
 .-. atjI I 2. j,-(C)' I =BF=' - i)f' = ( hf-dp) («f + df) 
 — 2.nF.(Bj:))., approximately. 
 ( -_, ) is also sufficiently <mall to be disregarded. 
 
 BD, the deflection, = 
 
 AB^/ 
 BF E' 
 
 k' 
 
 k E 
 
 n . ^ 
 
•en- 
 res- 
 
 II a 
 ! is 
 
 •of 
 
 
 tlie 
 
 ELEMENTARY DEFORMATION OF AN ARCHED RIB. 
 (11). — Elementary deformation of an arched n'h. — 
 
 101 
 
 The arched rib, roprosented by FIl,'. 13, sprintis fiom two abutments 
 and is under a vortical load. The neutral axis P(^ is the locus of tin; 
 centres of ijravity of all the eross-seetions of the rib, and may be 
 reirarded as a linear arcli, to which the conditions L^overiiiuL:; the equili- 
 briuui of the rib are equally applicable. 
 
 Let .LI' bi^ any cros.s-section of the rib. The sepnent .Li'/* is kept 
 in ecjuilibriuni by the external forces which act upon it. and by tho 
 molecular action at .LI'. 
 
 The external forces are reducible to a siiiirle force at C and to a 
 couple of which (he moment J/ is the al<rebraic sum of the moments 
 with respect to C of all the forces on the riirht of (\ 
 
 The sinj>le force at C may be resolved into a component T alonj» 
 the neutral axis, and a component S in the plane; A A'. Tlif latter haa 
 very little effect upon the curvature of the neutral axis, and may be dis- 
 rejrarded as compared with M. 
 
 Before deformation let the consecutive cross-sections lili' and AA' 
 meet in R; R is the centre of curvature of the arc (.'(/" of the neutral 
 axis. 
 
 After deformation it may be assumed that the plane .LI' romain.s 
 unchantrod. but that the jilane Bli' takes the position B"B"'. Let AA' 
 and B"B"' meet in R' ; R is the centre of curvature of the arc GC 
 after deformation. 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
102 
 
 ELEMENTARY DEFORMATION OF AN ARCIICD RIB. 
 
 Let nJx'. be any layer at a distance z from C 
 
 Let CC' = ^>i, CK=R, CR' r= li\ and let la be the seeiioual area of 
 
 the layer tihc. 
 
 T> • ., £ "c R' + z . iih R+z 
 
 By siuular figures, = — „— , and - = — j^- 
 Aii R Js R 
 
 mi M .1 ,, f"' ., A.*.' /I 1 \ 
 
 iho tensile Stress iiwf6r = 7:<.Aa.^-=:/i'.A^/.—- — ) 
 
 (lb ah y R R/ 
 
 = E.\<, -z. (^j^- - — ^ , very nearly. 
 
 The moment of this stress with respect to C=E.l((.;.^.\ — j^ \ 
 Hence, the moment of resistance at AA' 
 
 .jA-..„..^(±-i)=i'.(;^- ;>jw, 
 
 the intc'Tal extendin"- over the wliole of the section. 
 
 •"=^-'(-/r- /t) 
 
 (1) 
 
 Airain, the effect of the force T is to lonjithen or shorten the element 
 CC, so that the plane BB' will receive a motion of translation, but the 
 position of R' is practically unaltered. 
 
 Curulliirij 1. — ]jet A be the area of the section ^l.l'. 
 
 T M.z 
 The total unit stress in the; layer (thr=p=r -i____, (^2) 
 
 the sign being 7>^^s■ or iiuiiks according as J/ acts towards or from the 
 edge of the rib under consideration. 
 
 From this expression may l)e deduced. (1). — the position of the point 
 at which the intensity of the stress is a maxinium for any given distri- 
 bution of the load, (-). — the distribution (if the load that makes the 
 tensity an absolute maximum, (!>). — the value of the intensity. 
 
 Corolla n/ 2. — Let ir be the total intensity of the vertic il load per 
 horizontal unit of length. 
 
 Let »", be the portion of w which produces only a direct compression. 
 
 Let 7/ be the horizontal thrust of the arch. 
 
 Let y^ be the total load between the crown and .LI' which jtroduces 
 compression. 
 
 Refer the rib to the horizontal OX and the vertical OPV as the axes 
 of X and y, respectively. 
 
) 
 
 1) 
 
 i 
 
 GENERAL EQUATIONS, 
 Lot X, 1/, be the co-ordinates of C. 
 
 :.P=Ij:^;hvLtdF=w,.dx 
 
 d.c ' 
 
 103 
 
 also T=ill. 
 
 d? 
 ds 
 
 dx 
 
 (12). — Gcncnd equations 
 
 Let X, y, be tlie co-ordiuates of the point C before deformation 
 \ ^V/'- " " " " ^iftrr 
 
 '' e be an-le between tr.M-ent at G and OX before deformation 
 "'^'(='^-^^0 " <• " after '. ■ 
 
 " ds be the length of tlie element CC before deformation. 
 
 (3) 
 (■i) 
 
 ds' 
 
 after 
 
 <( 
 
 Effect of flexure. ^L.^.^,,n^f=' 
 ds W ds R 
 
 ■ ■ £.1 R' R ~ ds' di- 
 
 ''•AO:=:e-e'=^Ae„-r-^/t-dx, 
 
 J L.J dx 
 
 ds 
 
 ve 
 
 ry nearly. 
 
 (5) 
 
 ^(^o being the alteration of slope at F, which has yet to be determined. 
 Again, cos e'=zeos (ft - so)=eos ft + Afi.sinO 
 and siti 0'=zsi)iQ) - Aft) = sin ft - Aft.eos ft 
 
 . dx' dx di/ di/' dij 
 
 ds' 
 
 ds 
 
 'ds 
 
 ds' ds 
 
 ■ AO. 
 
 dx 
 
 17 
 
 (fi) 
 
 Effect of T and of a change of t" in the temperature. — 
 ds is compressed by T, and . • . its new length due to the compression 
 
 In order to make alhiwunce for the change in temperature, this last 
 expression must be multiplied by {l±a.t), a being the co-efficient of 
 linear dilatation of the material of the rib. 
 
 nt 
 
 .■.ds' = ds.(l-^--^y(l±a.t). (7) 
 
 Hence, by equations (G), 
 
 dx'==(dx + A ft.di/). (j. - -Ly^i j.„.,) 
 
 _ T 
 
 — dx + A d.di/ - -p—-dx±^a.t.dx, approximately. 
 
104 
 
 GENERAL EQUATIONS. 
 
 and dy'={ihj - a fl.^/x). (l - -^^ (1 ± ,,.0 
 
 T 
 = d\j- i^O.dx ~ p A 'dy ± a.t.dy, approximately 
 
 dy T 
 
 or, dx' - //x=d e,-d.Jx - -- .dx ± a.t.ilx 
 (tx Jli.A 
 
 and dy' -dy= -^ e.dx - -—'-■L^dr.-hn.t.'-^.dx 
 
 E. A dx dx 
 
 O O II 
 
 and J, -y= - j ^".^x- J^_.^,,fa ±j ,,. (. -,f & (9) 
 
 o 
 
 Let / be the span of the arch. 
 Let x„( = 0),y„, be tlie values oi'x.y, at 1\ 
 Let A Ox, .''i,. .'/u be the values of Aft, x\ y\ respectively, at Q. 
 
 C' M ds , 
 ..A.. = Aft„-J^-^.--.<fe (10) 
 
 o 
 
 a-,- /= r Aft.|£-</x - r^^-'^'^i r«-'-^- (11) 
 
 o o o 
 
 y,-y„=) A^.?x-j -^^-^^-.ci.± j ...-^.^, (12) 
 
 Again, the general equations of equilibrium at the plane AA' are, 
 ^M dS ^ ._ / ,,</^/x (13) 
 
 for the portion «',, Cor. 3, §(11), produces compression only and no shear, 
 .■.5=5„-J-...^x.//,(|-|^) („) 
 
 aS*,, being the still undetermined vertical component of the shear at P, 
 and '-— the slope at P, 
 
 UXg 
 
 and, iff = Mg-^-So-x - r A7(/x» + II. (y-y^- x.^'^ (15) 
 
 o o 
 
 Mg being the still undetermined bending moment at P. 
 
 Equations (8), (9), (14) and (15) contain the four undetermined 
 
 ds 
 constants H, S^, ^o,A^„, T being H.j- 
 
 11 
 
RIB OF UNIFORM STIFFNESS. 
 
 105 
 
 LctJ/,, S„ bo the values of M awl S, rospectivLly. at Q. 
 Equations of condition.-In practice the eiuis of the rib arc cither 
 Jixrd or free. 
 
 If they are fixed A ^,=0. if they arc free 3/;=0. I„ either case the 
 number of undotermiued constants reduces to f/iree. 
 
 If the abutments are immovable, .r, - /=(). If the abutments yield 
 x,-l must be found by experiment ; let .r, - I =,. //, . beinir ,c.me co- 
 eincient. 
 
 The^/-A'^ equation of condition is a-, - /— 0, or .r - (=ru If 
 A,<;ain, Q is immovable in a vertical direction.' 
 The second equation of condition is, //, - y^—Q 
 Again, if the end Q is fixed, A«,=0, and if free, .V, = 
 The third equation of condition is ^^, = 0, or il/, = 
 Substituting ,a equations (14) and (15) 'the values of the three 'con- 
 stants as detennmed by these conditions, the shearing force and bendin^. 
 moment may be found at any section of tlse rib. 
 
 (i;]) /p of uniform stiffness. -hot the depth anA sectional form 
 of the r.b be_ un.form, and let its breadth at each point vary as the 
 semnt of the .nchnation of the tangent at the point to the horizontal. 
 Let .4,, /„ be the sectional area and moment of inertia at the crown 
 
 A I, " " « . • ^ 
 
 at any point C. 
 :.A=A.sece=A,.^ (19) 
 
 Also, since the moments of inertia of similar figures vary as the 
 breadth and as the cube of the depth, and since the depth in the present 
 case IS constant, 
 
 (16) 
 (17) 
 (18) 
 
 • r r T ds 
 
 .1= I\. seiid=I,.-~ 
 
 . . T II, seed 
 Again, -= _ 
 
 A Ai. sec e 
 
 dx 
 
 (20) 
 
 // 
 
 -2, and the intensity of the thrust is con- 
 
 stant throughout. 
 
 Hence, equations (5), (8), and (9), respectively beeom,,, 
 
 II 
 
 X' -X — 
 
 f< 
 
 -,— dx 
 dx 
 
 EA 
 
 x± a.t.x 
 
 (21) 
 
 (22) 
 
 y'-y~-j ^^''^^~^;j{y~y.)±a.t.{y-y,) (23) 
 fi 
 
 
106 
 
 rARABOLIC RIB OF UNIFOIIM DEPTH Ax\D STIFFNESS. 
 
 Equation (21 ) shews tliat the dofloction at each point of the rib is 
 the same as that at correspond in;^ points of a straijj;ht liorizontal bi'aiu 
 of a uniform section ((jual to tliat of the rib at the crown, and acted 
 upon by the same bendini:; moments. 
 
 Ribs of uniform stiffness are not usual in practice, but the formulne 
 deduced in the present article may be applied without sensible error to 
 flat sejimental ribs of uniform section. 
 
 (13). — I'linif/olu: rlh of uniform dcpfh and stiffness, with rolling 
 load; the endu jiM'd in dircctioi: ; tlic idnifrntnts immovahlc. 
 
 9 
 
 i 
 
 D 
 
 V ■ 
 
 J 
 
 ^ . 
 
 - ,— — — rm. _Z^<— _ ==^— — — — —. _^ : ^ • 1 
 
 /■ - 
 
 .__yL__ 
 
 Fic.l^ 
 
 1 '//y'^/yyy-. - 
 
 Let the axis off bo a t:iii,ii*'nt to tlie neutral curve at its summit. 
 
 Let h be the ris(i of the curve. 
 
 Let X, ^, be the co-ordinat^^s at any point C with respect to 0. 
 
 A.kfi y 
 
 (24) 
 
 d Sf: /I di,, 4.k dji^ 'i.kd-/ HA; 
 
 and, ; - = ( _ _ x), -^ = — r' ~r — r 'ti = i^ C-5) 
 
 dx r V 2 (/.'•„ / '/'i I dx' /- ^ ' 
 
 Let «> be the dead loail per horizontal unit of length. 
 Letwj' " live " " " 
 
 Let the live load ccver a lenutli DIJ, - /'. /, of the span. 
 Denote by (.1) formula) rclatinu' to the unloaded division OE, and 
 by (7i) formuhv! relating to the loaded division DJJ 
 Equations (14) and (1.5) respectively become, 
 
 (A) s^-S,+ (^^-ir).x (26) 
 
 (B) S=>%, -f (^--AZ^ - »•) . X - w'. ]x -(1 - r).l\ (27) 
 (A) M^- M + .%,.x + (^dL _ ^o) -^ (28) 
 
 (B) J/- ^f, + S..X + (^-^ - «) .^l^'ix-(i-o./r (29) 
 
PAUABOLIC RIB OF UNIFORM DEPTH AND STIFFNESS. 
 
 Since the ends are fixed, _so„ = = Aff 
 Hence, by wiuatiuiis (21) and (28), 
 
 and by erjuations (21) and (29), 
 When .r=A A^^rr^^, =. (». a,.,] therefore by tlie hist e(,uatinn, 
 
 107 
 
 (30) 
 
 (31) 
 
 o=^i/„ 4- >y 
 
 Again, let :^fl^ , 
 dx 
 
 
 (32) 
 (33) 
 
 
 But A ff. = 0, and'i^^-= ^■^' 
 
 By the conditions of the problem, x' - x and / - y are each zero at (J. 
 Hence, equations (22) and (23) respectively becoue, 
 
 O 
 
 Substitute the value of A ^ in equation (32). and integrate between 
 the limits; 
 
 J -^(l.tj. 
 
 which may be written, 
 
 o=j/„ +§•.,+ (^/_ „.).f._ :::,.o,.+?./a_ -'.A'v, 
 
^^T3i 
 
 u 
 
 108 
 
 rAR\noiJc Rin of uniform dfpth and stiffness. 
 
 Ecjuations (133), (37), ami (3S), arc the equations of condition. 
 Stihtract (37) from (33), 
 
 .Siil)tract (37) from (3S). uml iiiiilti]iK the result by 3, 
 Sul)tr:ict (3!0 from (40). 
 
 ■•^•==H-7^-'')-.io-'^'-'-U-i.r(r)-2\i.:A-^ 4 ' /r ^^^^ 
 
 lleiico, 7/= (42) 
 
 V 4 K.A-.^^ 
 Elimiiiatin<,' .S'„ bctwct'ii (33) and (38), 
 
 " \ p / 12 V 3 4-^ ^ ^ 
 
 By equation (20), 3/ at Q is, 
 
 .,,,,.,A,..v„./..C^-)f'p-'' W 
 
 Eliniiiuvtinjz S^ between (33) and (44). 
 
 ••• - ^^^' == - ^^^" + V-7- - "" ) 6 - "■ •'"• (2-3; ^^5) 
 Substitute in this equation the value oi' M„ in (43), 
 
 ' V r^ / 12 V2 3 4/ ^ ^ 
 
 To find the greatest intensity 0/ stress, etc. — 
 
 T II 
 
 The intensity of the stres.s due to dire-^t compression — - = — 
 
 The intejisity of the stress in the outside layers of the rib due to 
 bending is the same as that in the outside layers of a horizontal beam of 
 uniform section A^ acU'd upon by the same moments as act on the rib, 
 for the deflections of the beam and rib are equal at every point, (Equa- 
 tion 21). Also, since the rib is fixed at both ends, the bondinj:^ 
 moment due to that portion of the load which produces flexure is a 
 maximum at the loaded end, i.e., at Q. Hence, the maximum inten- 
 
 sity of stress (p,) occurs at Q, and pi= — ± 3/,.-' (47) 
 
 Zi being the distance of the layers from the neutral axis. 
 
rAUAnoLic Kin of unifohm depth and stiffness. 109 
 
 // and J/, aro both functions of ,-, and thcrofun. p, is an uhmlnte 
 aximum when '^' = 0= A . '''^^- ^' 'Z''^' 
 But, }.»y wjuation (42), 
 
 
 and by equation (40), 
 
 k.(\ l^^.\'^ \ 
 
 
 " di: 
 
 dr \i"-dr 
 
 1 , n-'./^llV. (,_,,. 
 
 ■'^■/•.(i-f:*^.A \ A' 
 
 ^ 4 ,l„/r7 
 
 (49) 
 
 (50) 
 
 (51) 
 
 which may b(! written, 
 
 The ro(jt.s of tliia equation are, 
 
 1 , ^^i /, 
 
 •■— 1 and r=:-+-.2_ ^ vl|./.-' 
 
 (52) 
 
 (5:5) 
 
 r= 1 makes Ul zero, so that the maximum value of p corresponds to 
 
 one of thj remaining roots. 
 
 llence, the maximum thnist= 1 ( II +^ .M^) ^p\ (54) 
 
 the values of II and M^ being obtained by substituting iu Equations 
 (42) and (4G), ^ i ^ 
 
 (55) 
 
 r = ~ 
 
 I ^--^^ A 
 
 ^ 1 -_^ A 
 
 2 1-/- 
 and the maximum tension = —. ^ - H + ^^[ J^/^ =^y/' /'gg\ 
 
 the values of // and M^ being obtained by substituting in Equations 
 (42) and (4i;), 
 
no 
 
 p\ii\noLic lun OF unifgum depth and stiffness. 
 
 »• ==- 
 
 1 , 45 A 
 
 5,3 A 
 
 (57) 
 
 1 + X- 
 
 2 vl,.2,.A' 
 
 Efjuation (54) will give the jn-opi-r Hcctioruil area wlii'ii the depth 
 ami i'lirui (if tlu- rib have been fixctl. 
 
 If Eiinatioii (.')()) gives a negative result there is no tension at any 
 point of tiK! rib. 
 
 Curolliin/ 1. — The moment of inertia liiay bo expressed in the form, 
 
 /, = g.2'f./l„ 
 q being a eo-effic'eiit whieh depends upon the. figure of the section. 
 
 .'. the vi'i.n'minn thrust = -•(II -f — ' ) (58) 
 
 JiV q.z\/ 
 
 and the corresponding value of /• is, 
 
 
 1 -1 45 3? 
 
 1 + _ .n. _' , 
 
 ;} z, y (^ 
 
 — O.J 
 o ■< /. 
 
 — -■-, suppose. 
 
 (59) 
 
 By (42;, 7/ = 
 
 v'.l* ,15 .EI. t n '5 T 15 4 ,3 5\ 
 
 8 - H k V4 8 • 4 / 
 
 k. b 
 
 (GO) 
 
 ,.2 9 
 
 By(4n),.,/,= -r.,.//,!^„„,,.(^l.-.,.,_;^) 
 
 lb ^ A-'' 4 k Vb 4 'If, ,., //-^ 2 , r*\ 
 = 1 +"-'^-(2-3'"4) 
 
 •• '^ q.z, S.h \k 2 /tV"*" 4q.z^\ 2/^7 
 ^^(^,5 15 3,x /5 5 rS) ,^^ 
 ^5..~,./>( /c W S-'^U- J Vb' 4' '^2Ji'^y..^, V-i 3 "^4/ 
 
 8.6 VA- 2 A-V 4 q.zyk h q.z, jb* 4 2) ( h j 
 
 -^^;(2-3-''^r) 
 
 But 1 - ;=• V=c and r=-- 
 2 a; c 
 
 . T1 a. '^^> - "--^ /I 15 2, \ _ 1 a.^J?./, «,'.;» /r* ,.' r« x ^^^^ 
 
PAUABOLIC RIB OF UNIFORM 
 
 l»i:i"TII AND STIKFXESS. HI 
 
 Hence, ;/„ tho muxitnum thrust = ^ 
 
 .V, 
 
 
 7 -f 
 
 15 
 
 
 r-k > I 
 
 '> i.i 
 
 1 + 
 
 45 : 
 
 rn 
 
 -^\at.E.L ir',p 
 
 
 
 Similarly./,",, the m;xhunn teminn = -^ ( - n,\- ^'^' ) 
 15 .:, 1 ^ ' 
 
 4 /i" 
 
 3 
 
 v^- /•=•+". 
 
 (C3) 
 
 t^>;W/..^ 2.-Lct tho depth of the rib be small compared with k. 
 .-. ;■ is a small fraction, and the maximum value of ;>. both for tension 
 and compression corresponds to r = |, approximately. 
 Hence, equations (02) and (G3), respectively become 
 
 P 
 
 P 
 
 A U U -^ 2 kO ^4 7^-+ aT25- ,T ! (64) 
 
 ^..0..-, 3.-If 2.>5.. then . mustt'lv, '"^ ''^'^ 
 ^^Lquations (42), (40), (C.2) and (G3), in thi^' case respectively be 
 
 I'w + w' 15 a. t E.I, 
 
 H^ 
 
 
 1 15 2, 
 
 aA 8 '"-r-^VTrx +20-^.1 
 
 i'. = -r 
 
 
 _ 1 15^, 
 
 ^,( 8 
 
 (68) 
 
 (69) 
 
 ^ Lorof/,n-y 4.— A nearer approximation than is given by the preced- 
 ing results may be obtained as follows :- « J^ « Pieced 
 
 deLmatio '^^' ^ ^ ^^' ^^ ^^"^ co-ordinates of a point very near C before 
 
112 
 
 PARABOLIC Rin OF UNIFORM STIFFNESS. 
 
 Let x' + dx', y' + dy', be the co-ordinates of a point very near C after 
 deforuiatlon. 
 
 .-. ds"" = dx^ + dy-" and f/.s'^ = dx"' + dy'"" 
 .-. ds'^ - di = dx!^ - dx? + dy" - dy" 
 or, (ds' - ds). (ds' + ds) = (dx' - dx). {dx' + dx) + {dy' - dy)(dy' + dy) 
 .• (ds - ds).ds:=(dx' - dx).dx + {dy' - dy)dy, approximately. 
 
 ds , -, , , ^ dy 
 
 .-. dx' - dx = ids' - ds). "- - (dy' - dy)/li 
 
 dx 'ix 
 
 da 
 
 and dy' - dy - (ds' - ds)'!l /if - (rfx' - dx) . ^ 
 
 dx dy 
 Hence, by Equations (6) and (7), 
 
 y%.. T /ds^^ 
 dx 
 
 dx'-dx=.M'^,dx - -£. Y f y,c7;c +«.<. C^y, 
 
 E.A \dxj - \dxJ 
 
 Jx 
 
 T /ds\'dx J , /dsVdx 
 .dx ^3«.^ . 
 
 dy \dxJ dy 
 
 and dy' - dy= - SO.dx - J. (% \ !^^,dx ±a.t.{'ll] ."^^.dx 
 
 XL. A \dx/ df/ 
 
 ■ < f^'^y 
 
 :.x' -X— /Mr' '.dx- / __. _ . ((x-h<i.t. I (—-\ .dx 
 
 J dx J E.A\dx) - J ydx) 
 
 J J EA\dx)\hj ~ J \dJ-dy- 
 
 O o o ' 
 
 These equations are to be used instead of equations (8) and (9), the 
 remainder of the caicuhitions being computed pre isely as before. 
 
 (14). Parabolic Rib of uniform stiffness, supported at the ends, but 
 not fi.t(<l. — 
 
 Let the rib be simihir to that of the preceding article, but let its ends 
 be free. In this case J/„=ilf, = 0, while a is an undetermined con- 
 stant. 
 
 'J'he following equations apply : — 
 
 (A) S=S,-\-(^-^- w^x 
 
 (B) S=So+i^-^- n^x-w'.\x-(l-r).l\ 
 
 (A) M= S,.x + (^— - - w) •- 
 
 , T»x i# cy /S.k.II \ X* to' . 
 
 (B) M= S^.x + (-^- - «, j ._ - _.|x - (1 - r).ll^ 
 
 
 (26') 
 (270 
 ^28') 
 (29') 
 (31') 
 (32') 
 
113 
 
 PARABOLIC RIB OF UNIFORM STIFFNESS. 
 
 Assume that the horizontal and vertical displacements of the loaded 
 end are ml Substitute the value of a 6 from (32') m (35) and (3G) • 
 integrate and reduce, neglecting the term involving the temperature ' 
 
 -''=^''-U<-(^^"--)L-'^'^ (380 
 
 From (29*), :ince J/,=0, 
 
 Equations (37'), (38'), and (70), are the equations of condition 
 Subtract (38') from (37'), 
 
 ''•'=m}'^ 
 
 /> 1 
 
 which may be written, 
 
 Subtract (71) from (70), 
 
 o)--- w'.l. ( V - - -r ~\ + 3 7/ ^' . ^ 
 
 /5 V2 2"5;+^-^^x^ 
 
 .-.0=/^ 
 
 7V 
 
 Hence, Ii= 
 
 PAio + ~^(5y-5.r* + 2.r')l 
 
 (71) 
 (72) 
 
 (73) 
 
 8Jc.(l-,l^A.L) 
 \ 8 A./c^J 
 
 Eliminating *S'„ between (38') and (70), 
 
 Also, by (27'), 
 
 ^i = ^o+ {^—ji wj .1 - w'.rj= - P, suppose. (75) 
 
 Eliminating ,S; between (70) and (75) 
 
 ••■-^=^-('#'-)f»'K'-2-) W 
 
 (70), (73). (74) and (76) give the values of //, ^„, ^„ and 
 Agam, the maximum bending moment M' occurs at a point given by 
 
 ^ = 0.n(29'). 
 8 
 
 (7V) 
 
 M 
 
114 
 
 PARABOLIC RIB OF UNIFORM STIFFNESS. 
 
 Subtract (77) from (75), 
 
 Hence, the distance from the loaded end of the point at which tlie 
 bending moment is greatest is, 
 
 F 
 
 (78) 
 
 l — x=- 
 
 to + V) 
 
 S.k:H_ 
 
 Substitute this value of .r in (29'), and. for convenience, put 
 
 8./.-.// 
 
 ii; + }C — 
 
 P 
 
 == 711. 
 
 ^ ?/•' -- m , w' , , 
 But by (70), 0=S„+-^,^—l-,yi^.l 
 
 P' (79) 
 
 Hence, M\ the maximum bendlug m<)nuiif. = - 
 
 -~7 , S.I:.IJ\ 
 
 As before the greatest stress (a fhriisf) = -j' ( H + ^j^M'j -7''i-(^^) 
 
 and the value of r which niakrs //, an ohsnhitr niaxiniuui is given by 
 
 ^=0. But by (79), M' ijivolvos /•'" in the numoraior, and r' in the 
 dr 
 
 denominator, so that 'p = <l. will bo an ((lUiitimi involving /•". 
 
 (ir 
 
 One of its roots is r=l. which g.iuTixlly -ives a niiinwinn value of 
 
 //,. Dividing by r- 1, the o(iuiitinn reduces to one of the thirtroith 
 
 order, but is still far too complex lor use. It is found, howeve;, that 
 
 r=i "ives a riosr (i/iprnj-iinnfimi to the dhsolufi' maximum thrust. 
 
 . , 15 7, 1 _ 
 With this value of /•, and, i(.>r oonvenience, jiutting 1 4 - -j^ j^^ 
 
 = n. 
 
 By (73), -^=8:/;r7\""'-2.)' 
 
 By (70), S.= ^-^{>r-,-^y~^-^\, 
 
 (HI) 
 (82) 
 
•8) 
 
 PATIABOLIC RIB OF UNIFORM STIFFNESS. 
 .,(74), -.=,^,{0-i;>'i^'-^'} 
 
 B, (76), -S, = P=U(„:^'^)^^"' 
 
 Ej (78), 
 
 By (70) 
 
 ( "-'N n-\ w' 
 
 ,_8-{("'^ 2) — ^-| 
 / w'\ n-\ w' 
 
 M= 
 
 115 
 
 (83) 
 (84) 
 
 (85) 
 (80) 
 
 (15). — PuriihoUc Rib of uni/onu stiffness hinged at the crown and 
 also at the ends.-h^ this case J/= at the crown, which introduces a 
 fourth equation of condition. 
 
 By(2n o=.„.^.(?^_.).(:.:^.(_i,,y 
 
 which may be written, 
 
 Eliminating S^ between (85) and (70), 
 
 8./.-.// 
 .-. -J- - w =. w'.( - 2r' + 4r - 1) 
 
 Hence, ^i=^^- \w- io'.(2r^ _ 4^ + 1 W 
 
 By (87), 
 By (76), 
 By (74), 
 
 S^=~{(3r'~4r+1) 
 
 i.=s,=i^--',(,.-i)- 
 
 A 6.,= 
 
 7C'.P 
 
 " 24. E.I 
 
 ■(l-4.r + 4.r'-r*) 
 
 --(r-1) 
 
 By (78) and (^QO),l-x=;^ _ 
 
 tj.w (^r —- L ) 
 
 By (79), ^f='!^Xr-ly 
 
 _ _/ 
 
 '~ 4 
 
 (88) 
 (8;)) 
 (90) 
 (91) 
 
 (92) 
 (93) 
 
116 MAXIMUM DEFLECTION OF AN ARCHED RIB. 
 
 When r=\, 
 
 1 U'\P . ,„ ,r'./^ 
 
 I 
 
 (94) 
 
 These results agree with those of (81) to (80), if?( = l. 
 In gi'mnil, when » = 1, 
 
 w + ^ (5.,-^ - b.r* + 1.r') = w - U-' (2./-^ - 4./- + 1), by (73) and (88) 
 
 .•.2./-''- 5.r« + 9./-' + 8./- + 2 = 0= (2./- - !).(/• - 1 y.{r' - 2), 
 
 1 , - 
 
 and the roots are, r=-, r=l, r- ± v2. 
 
 Hf'iico, ?( = 1 only renders the expressions in (94) identical with the 
 corresponding expressions of the preceding article when h=\ or 1. 
 
 Again, the intensity of thrust is greatest at the outer flange of the 
 loaded and the inner flange of the unloaded half (if the rib. and is 
 
 =8-i;-i7,H-n-("'-^2J i 
 
 2,h/ 1 / V'\ . 
 
 The intensity of tension is greatest at the inner flange of the loaded 
 and the outer flange of the unloaded half »tf the rib, and is 
 _ P (2, 
 
 ■ O, 
 
 The greatest total horizontal thrust occurs when r=l, and its value is 
 
 -^.("■ + «0 
 
 (16). — Maximum (leJl"cti'on of an archrd rib The deflection must 
 
 Dccessarily be a niaxiuiuui at a point given by A fl={). Solve for x and 
 substitute in (9) to find the deflection y' ~ y ; the deflection is an abso 
 
 hue maximum when — .(_y' - y)=i{). The resulting ecjuation involves r 
 
 to a high power, and is too intricate to be of use. It has been found by 
 trial, however, that in all ordinary cases the absolute maximum deflec- 
 tion occurs at the middle of the rib, when the live load covers its whole 
 
 length, I.e., when Jt^ = —y, and r=l. 
 
 45 /, 
 
 =s 
 
 Case I. — Rib o/ §(13). -For convenience, put 1 •♦"~T'~r7.2= 
 
 /» w + w ' IbaAE.I^ 
 
 8jk r -¥« "1^ 
 
 .-. By (42), 
 
 U= 
 
 (95) 
 
MAXIMUM DEFLECTION OF AN ARCHED lUB. II7 
 
 By (48) ana (4«),-,V„=^^.(„. ,. ,,ylzJ^l'^J,^ _ ,,^ (,,,, 
 
 liy (3S; and (4:i), ,V„= - (1.''^" ^gj^ 
 
 By m, (4:i,, (,,7,, .„= - ^!-^. (,,„.. _ ,,,,,;^, ,,.,,;j;') ^...^ 
 
 IK'uoc, the niaxiimitii dofloctidn 
 
 384/;./,' s "^l^w'T'Z-"'^" ^"PP"'^^- (99) 
 
 The central d.-flectmn ,/, of a uniform straight b.rizontal beam of 
 
 same span, ofsamo section as the rib at the crown, and with its ends 
 nxed, IS, 
 
 I* w + w' 
 
 (100) 
 
 '^^"r84i^ 
 
 Henco, neglecting the term involving the temperature, 
 
 ^h=~^.L 
 
 Case U.—jm, of^{U).~ 
 By (78), //= 
 
 P w + w' 
 
 (101) 
 
 (102) 
 
 By (74) and (70), ., = ^-^,.. .o/^=^,(103) 
 
 By(32),(102)and(103),..= ^.(;:.|!,i;) ^,,,^ 
 
 Hence, the maximum deflection 
 
 A^/■:/ V12 2 -3T/;-'^-^=3^47r/<'''-*-'^')-— ='^'. (1^5) 
 
 If the ends of the beam in Case I are free, its central defection 
 
 384 EJ " 
 
 2) 
 
 , . « , d 
 
 n 
 
 (106) 
 
 Thus, the deflection of the arched rib in both cases is less than that 
 of the beam. 
 
118 
 
 HORIZONTAL DISTUIBUTING GIRDER. 
 
 (17). — Archfd rlh of uniform slijf'm'ssfxid at the. ends and cnnnerted 
 at the crown viith n horizonful distrlhufing girder (Sac ^ (2). — The 
 load is transiiiitU'd U) the rib by vertical struts so that the vertical dis- 
 plaeemeiits (if correspoiidiiijj; puiiits df the rib and ^irdiT are the same. 
 The lutrizoiital thrust in tiie load^il is not lu'cossarily erjual to that in 
 the uiiloadi'd division of the rib, but the excess of the tlirust in the 
 loadt'd division will be borne by the distributinir trirdei, if the rib and 
 frirder are connected in such a manner that the horizontal displacement 
 of each at tlu' crown is the same. 
 
 Till- forniulii3 of )^ (18) are applicable in the present case with tlie 
 modification that /, is to include the uioment of tlie inertia of the girder. 
 
 Tilt' maximum thrust and tension in the rib arc given by Equations 
 ((11) and (05). 
 
 Let ,: ' be the depth of the girder, A ' its sectional area, 
 
 11 M,.z' 
 
 The ureatest thrust in the girder == 
 
 (( 
 
 tension 
 
 .'l, + .l'"^ 2.A\/, 
 
 (107) 
 
 (lOfi) 
 
 7/ and J/, being given by Etjuations ((iO) and (t)7), respectively. 
 
 The girder must luive its ends so supported as to be capable of trans- 
 mitting a thrust. 
 
 (18). — Semi-circulnr timber rlh. hinged at the ends. 
 
 Let F C Q be the axis of such 
 a rib. Consider a portion (X'" 
 bounded by vertical planes at C 
 and C. 
 
 Let ;r, i/ be the co-ordinates of 
 r' with resjM'ct to (\ 
 
 Let /• be the radius of the semi- 
 circle. 
 
 Let w 1)0 the intensity of the 
 load which is assumed to be uni- 
 form/i/ distributed horizontalli/. 
 
 The moment of resistance of the rib at 6" = the algebraic sum of the 
 moments of the thrust at C, and of the weight upon CC, with respect 
 to (7'. 
 
 M=-U.ij + 
 
 ir. x^ 
 
STRESSES IN SPANDRIL POSTS AND DIAGONALS. 
 
 119 
 
 v\ r 
 
 >> 
 
 At either end, x — i/-r. and Jf= 0. .", //= 
 alsox* = ^. (2. >•--//) 
 
 ?r 
 
 J/ is a maximum when // = -^, its value then being — ^ 
 
 In the horiz(tntal tan^-nt at (\ take CG = — ; Q G will be the direction 
 
 of the resultant thrust at Q. 
 
 (19). — Sfrcsst's in spiDufri/ j>(>stx itnd duujnnuh. 
 
 Fip:. 1(5 ri'prosents 
 an arch in which the 
 spaiulril consists (»t' a 
 series of vertical posts 
 and diau'onal braces. 
 
 Let the axis of the 
 curved rib be a para- 
 bola. The arch is tiuiii equilibrated under a unil'uruily distributed 
 load, and the diagonals will be only called into play under a passing 
 load. 
 
 Letx, ^, be the co-ordinates of any point i^ of the parabola with re- 
 
 ^f' 2 
 spect to the verte^ o. .'. y = -jy' -'^ 
 
 Let the tangent at F meet C B in />, and the horizontal B E in G. 
 
 Let BC=k' :. BL = BC-CL = BG-CN=k'-y. 
 
 Let i.Vbe the total number of panels. 
 
 Consider any diagonal E I) between the /<-th and (h 4- l)-th posts. 
 
 Let u''be the greatest panel (ivc load. 
 
 Tlie greatest compression in ED occurs when the passsng load is con- 
 centrated at the first h-1 panel points. 
 
 Imagine a vertical section a little on the left of EF. 
 
 The portion of the frame on the right of this section is kept in wjuili- 
 brium by the reaction R at I* and by the stresses in the three members 
 met by the secant plane. 
 
 Take moments about G. 
 
 :. D.GE.cos e=R.AG, 
 D being the stress in DE, and 6 the angle DEF. 
 
120 
 
 METHOD OF DETERMININC RESULTANT THRUSTS. 
 
 The greatest thru.st in EF = w' + 
 " " tension " = D.coxd- 
 
 Now,;;=";'.'^ 
 
 , x+C B k' + y ,, „ k'.x - .T.y 
 
 and • aE=GH^.c J''^;^^'!' ^ «,.d GA =U^L±Z^ 
 
 •J,y 2 'l.y 
 
 ,, T^ "'' « " - 1 /'/ + k'.x -xy 
 
 Hence, Z>=—. r^ — .-^^ -.strd 
 
 2 N k ..I ^x.ij 
 
 The stresses in the counter braces, (shewn by clotted lines in the Fig.), 
 may be obtained in the same manner. 
 
 w 
 xus f - ?p, 
 %o being the dead load upon EF, 
 
 If the last expression is negative, EF is never in tension. 
 
 (20) — CUrk MuxwvU s method 0/ determining the resultavf thrustn 
 at the anjiporis of a framed arch. 
 
 Lei .^ .s be the change in the length s of any meu-bcT of the frame 
 
 under the action of a force P, and let u be tlie sectional area of the 
 
 member. 
 
 P 
 
 ,•. ±-rr--*>' = •^•'*j the sign depending upon the character of the stress. 
 E.a 
 
 Assume that all the members, except the one under consideration, arc 
 
 perfectly rigid, and let Sf be the alteration in the span / corresponding 
 
 a/ 
 
 to As. The ratio — is equal to a constant m, which depends only upon 
 the geometrical form of the frame. 
 
 .'.a/ =w. as = rh ni.P. ,\— 
 
 E.a 
 
 Again, F may be supposed to consist of two parts, viz., /, due to a 
 
 horizontal force // between the springings, and /, due to a vertical 
 
 force V applied at one springing, while the other is firmly secured to 
 
 keep the frame from turning. 
 
 By the principle of virtual velocities, 
 
 f_A/ ^^^^ 
 
 II AS 
 
 A:. 
 
 Similarly, ! is equal to some constant n, which depends only upon 
 
 the form of the frame, 
 
 P==f+A==m.JI+n.V 
 
 .: Al=± (m\II +m.7i.V)-r^ 
 
METHOD OF DETERMINING RESULTANT THRUSTS. 121 
 
 Hence, the total clian^o in I for all the members is, 
 
 I.sl=±^(in- /I. ■' ) 4- :l( m.ii.V. ,' ] 
 
 If the abutments yield, let ^:s/=u.//, n being some co-offieient to be 
 determined by experiment. 
 
 If the abutments are iuunovable, 2..^/ is zero. 
 
 (A) 
 
 and 11= - 
 
 
 (B) 
 
 T^ is the same as the corresponding reaction at the end of a girder of 
 the same span, and similarly loaded. The required thrust is the 
 resultant of 77 and T', and the stress in each member may be computed 
 grapliically or by the method of moments. In any particular case pro- 
 ceed as follows : — 
 
 (1 ).-Prepare tables of the values of /u and n for each menibcr. 
 (2).-Assunie a cross-section for each member, based on a probable 
 assumed value for the resultant of Fand //. 
 
 (3) .-Prepare a table of the value of ;>r.^— for each member, and 
 
 h.ii 
 
 form the sum j; ( »r. 1,- ) 
 V E.n I • 
 
 (4). -Determine, separately, the horizontal thrust between the spring- 
 ings due to the loads at the different joints. Thus, let c,, r.^ be the 
 vertical reactions at the right and left supports due to any onv of these 
 
 loads. Form the sum zim.n.V. — ^ using c, for all the members on 
 
 the right of the load and r^ for all those on its left. The corresponding 
 thrust may then be found by E<iuation (A) or Equation (B), and the 
 total thrust 11 is the sum of the thrusts due to all the weights taken 
 separately. 
 
 (5).-Ref eat the process for each combination of live and dead load 
 so as to find the maximuiu stresses to which any member may be sub- 
 jected. (§7). 
 
122 MKTIIOD OF DETEKMINING KESULTANT THRUSTS. 
 
 (C).-Ifthe assuuifd cross-soctions arc not suitiulto these maximum 
 stresses, make fresh assumpticms, and rcjxat the wlide ealcnhition. 
 
 i\^o/r -The same method may he applicl to determine the resultant 
 tensions at tlie supports of a framed suspension bridge. 
 
 Notr.— The fcrmuhe for a paraholie rib may be applied without 
 mate-rial error to a rib in the form of a se-ment ofacirele. More 
 exaet formulio may he obtained for the latter in a manner precisely 
 similar to that described in Articles ll} to 17, but the integrations will 
 be n.ueh simplified by using polar coordinates, the centre of the circle 
 beiiig the hole. 
 
 !■ ^ I 
 
CTTAPTER VI. 
 
 DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 (1). — Chonh (tfmit'iu tnissrs (itiJ Jfoor hffnvs. — Tlio diordsof a main 
 truss are to be dcsiu'iu'd fur a uiiii'orm distributiDii of the live load over 
 the whole of the bridire. 
 
 First, let the depth of the truss be uniform throuirhout. Draw the 
 curve of bending moments A c E G K M o Q s to a given scale. Any ordin- 
 ate of the same curve may, by altering ihe scale, be made to represent 
 tlie thickness of the cliord at its foot. 
 
 Erect ordinates 1 C, 2 E, 'A (i...at each panel point, and complete the 
 rectangles BS, DQ, FO, and IIM. The broken outline a B C D E F G u i. m 
 o P Q R S is a delineation of the least admissable thickness of the chord at 
 different points in its length. 
 
 The floor-beams of a highway bridge are subjected to a distribution of 
 load which is ajtproximately uniform, and may be designed in the same 
 manner, 
 
 IVicorctioiUi/, the thickness of the cliord at the ends is zero, but in 
 practice it is made equal to that at the nearest panel point. 
 
 Next, let the depth of the truss or beam vary. Draw the bending 
 moment curve to such a scale that its greatest ordinate coincides with 
 the central depth. If this curve be taken as the axis of the chord, the 
 thickness of the latter is constant. 
 
124 
 
 PLATFORM. 
 
 Let A B be 
 the betidiiif; iiio- 
 liiciit curve for 
 tilt' U'lisidii fliingc! 
 of 11 fldor-bt'iiiu 
 I'ur ;i hiirliway 
 bridp', the ci;ii- 
 tral depth of the 
 beam being II 
 
 (Fig. 2). AO B\)i the uxia of the curved flange, but. in order to avoid 
 the difficulty of curving, the flange is oft^in constructed iu three straight 
 pieces AG, CD, Dli, tangential to the curve, 
 
 Iu r<tl/)r(ii/ brid- 
 ges, the live load is 
 concentrattid at sin- 
 gle points of the 
 floor beams. Thus, 
 for a si.'xife track, 
 the bending mo- 
 ment carve is the 
 broken lin^ ACDB 
 (Fig. 3). the load 
 being applied at the 
 two points E and 
 F, while for a 
 (hmhie track the curve is the broken line AG C D II B, the load being 
 applied at the four points A', E. F, and L, (Fig. 4). 
 
 As before, if // is the central li'pth of the beam, the broken line 
 in each Fig. is the axis of the corresponding tension flange, whi-ih may 
 therefore be made of fhne .'Straight pieces for the single, and of Jive for 
 the double track. In the latter case, however, the flange is generally 
 made of the three straight pieces, AM, J/.V, NB. 
 
 The depth of a floor-beam may vary from i-th to J-th of its clear span, 
 and should be made as great as possible. 
 
 (•^)- Fhifform. — The floor of a higJnrni/ bridge is laid upon a series 
 of stringers, which run parallel to the centre line of the bridge, are 
 spaced 2-ft. centre U^ centre, and are supported by the floor-beams. The 
 latt<}r are consequently loaded at several equi-distant points, and the dis- 
 tribution of the load may be assumed to be approximately uniform. In 
 
PINS. 
 
 125 
 
 a railway bridp;e a strinper is usually placod uiulornoath each line of 
 rails, and is supported by the floor-beams, wliich may, thori'f'ore, bo loadi'd 
 at two ox four points accordinj^ to the numb;.^ of the tracks. 
 
 The entire platform may be constructed of timber wherever such 
 material is abundant. The floor of a narrow bri(l};e, for examiijc. may 
 consist of strong? planks stretehing between the main trussi's, or. better 
 sti'.l, the planks may be laid upon timber floor-beams. These fl(»or 
 beams, for a sinjjjle-track bridj^e, are often 12-ins. widt; by !)-ins. deep, 
 and are spaced about 3-ft. centre to centre. The rails are laid upon 
 longitudinal strinjrers which are about 12 ins. wide by 9-ins. deep and 
 are notched and spiked to the floor-beams. In all such ca.ses the main 
 trusses should be braced together with iron tie-rods. 
 
 A timber platform may be .set on fire by the cinders from a locomo- 
 tive, and it is sometimes neces.sary to protect the surface with iron 
 plates, gravel, etc. If there is any traffie underneath the bridge the 
 planks should be tongued, and the joints caulked, so as to prevent leak- 
 
 age. 
 
 The entire roadway is rarely made to depend upon timber only, 
 except in the case of small bridges. The longitudinals and floor-beams 
 may be of wrought-iron or steel, and are nearly always /-shaped in 
 section. Rolled joists, from 4-ins. deep and 18-lbs. per lineal yd. to 15- 
 ins. deep and 2()0-lbs. per yd., may be obtained in the market at a 
 reasonable cost, and are recommended as floor-beams. In railway 
 bridges, however, built plate-beams are more common, as they can be 
 connected to the main trusses with greater ease and efiect. In design- 
 ing these plate-beams, the dimensions of the plates should be kept as 
 uniform as is practicable, and should be such as are obtainable in the 
 market, special sizes invariably adding to the cost. 
 
 The floor is often made of timber for the sake of economy and light- 
 ness, but a floor of curved, corrugated, buckled, or flat plates stiffened 
 with angles or tees, will add to the strength and durability of the whole 
 bridge. 
 
 Cast-iron floor-beams have been rarely adopted except in cast-iron 
 bridges. 
 
 (3). — Pins. — One of the most important members of a bridge con- 
 structed on the pin-system is the eye-bar, or link, which is a flat bar with 
 enlarged ends, having eyes for the insertion of bolts or pins. The eyes 
 are forged in the ends under hydraulic pressure, with suitably shaped 
 dies. Careful mathematical and experimental investigations have been 
 undertaken to determine the proper dimensions of the link-head and pin. 
 
126 
 
 PINS. 
 
 In consequence of the complex character of the stresses devclopoJ, an 
 exdct mathematical solution is impossible, but approximate results may 
 be obtained whicli differ very little from the results of experiment. 
 
 Let d be the 
 depth, and t ^hc 
 thickness of the 
 sh<nik of the cyo- 
 bar represented in 
 Fi,L'. 5. Let S be 
 the width of the 
 meLal at the sides 
 of the I'ye, and JI 
 the width at the 
 end. Let D be the 
 diameter of the pin. 
 
 The proportions of the head are governed by the general condition 
 that each and every part should be at least as strong as the shank. 
 
 When the bar is subjected to a tensile stress the pin is tightly em- 
 braced, and failure may arise from any one of the filldwing causes: — 
 
 {(i). -The pin mnij he shorn thr'mgh. 
 
 Hence, if the pin is in double shear, its sectional area should be at 
 least one-hdf {hat of the shank. 
 
 It may happen that the pin is bent, but that fracture is prevented by 
 the closing up of the pit ces between the pin-head and nut ; the efficiency, 
 howi'ver, of the connection is destroved, as the bars are no longer free to 
 turn on the pin. 
 
 2 4 
 
 In practice, I) iovji<it bars, varies from ^-d to - d but usually lies 
 
 between - -a and —-il. 
 4 5 
 
 The diar. of the pin for the end of a round bar is generally made equal 
 to Irjr-times the diar. of thi; bar. 
 
 Tiie pin should be turned so as to fit the eye accurately, but tlie best 
 practice allows a difference of from ^L to j J^ in the diars, of the pin and 
 eye. 
 
 (J)). -The link may tear acroasMN. 
 
 Hence, the sectional area of the metal across ^VA^'must be at least equal 
 
 to that of the shank, and in practice is always greater. 
 
 11 5 
 
 S varies from ^q'^^ to -^ 
 
EFFECT OF BENDING ACTION UPON A PIN. 
 
 1.27 
 
 Tlic sectional aroa throiiuh tho Hides of the eye in the head of a round 
 bar varies from li-timcs to ticicr thatof tlio bar. 
 
 (c).-The pin may he torn through the head. 
 
 Theoreticallij, the sectional area of the metal across /'(^should be one- 
 half that of the shank. The metal in front of the pin. however, may be 
 likened to a uniformly loadeil girder with both ends tixed, and is subjected 
 to a bending as well as to a shearing action. Hence, the tain iiniiin value of 
 
 11 has been fixed at - •(/, and if // is made equal to cl, both kinds of action 
 
 will be amply provided for. 
 
 (d).— The bearing s)ir/ace niai/ he instiffielint. 
 
 If such be the case the intensity of the pressure upon the bearing 
 surface is excessive, the eye becomes oval, the metal is upset, and a 
 fracture takes place. 
 
 In practice, adequate bearing surface is obtained, by thickt'ning th<i 
 head so as to confine the maximum intensity of tin; pressure within a 
 given limit. 
 
 (^e).— The head may he torn through the shou/drr at XV. 
 
 ii !!■ , A'l'' is made CfpUil to (/. 
 
 The radius of curvature Ji of the shoulder varies frmn Ih-d to 1 .Gd 
 
 d 1 
 
 Note. — The thickness of the shank should be - or „•</ at least, 
 
 4 / 
 
 (4). — Efect of bending action ujion pin. 
 
 Figs, li and 7 represent groups of cy mjuis a.s tliey often oeeii in prac- 
 tice. 
 
 Let two sets of 2.» bars pull upon the pin in opposite directions, and 
 assume that the distribution of pressure between the pin and the eye- 
 bar heads is uniform. 
 
 Let P be the stress in each bar. 
 
128 
 
 GENERAL REMARKS. 
 
 Let;) ue the distance between the centre lines of two consecutive bars. 
 All the forces on each half of the pin are evidently equivalent to a 
 couple of which the moment is n.P. j). 
 
 Hence, at any section of the pin between the innermost bars, 
 
 c 
 /bcinir the stress in the material of the pin at a distance c from the 
 neutral axis, and / the moment of inertia. 
 
 If there are 2« - 2 bars in one set, the bending action at the centre of 
 the pin is nil. 
 
 In general, the bending action upon a pin connecting a number of 
 vertical, horizontal, and inclined bars, may be determined as follows : — 
 
 Consider one-half of the pin 
 only. 
 
 Let V, Fig. 8, be the resultant 
 stress in the vertical bars. 
 
 It is necessarily equal in magni- 
 tude but opposite in direction to 
 the vertical component of the re- 
 sultant of the stresses in the inclined bars. Let v be the distance 
 between the lines of action of these two resultants. The correspond- 
 ing bending action upon the pin is that due to a couple of which the 
 moment is V. v. 
 
 Let h be the distance between the lines of action of the equal resul- 
 tants //of the horizontal stresses upon each side of the pin. The cor- 
 responding bending action upon the pin is that dug to a couple of which 
 the moment is //. h. 
 
 Hence, the maximum bending action is that due to a couple of which 
 the moment is the resultant of the two moments V.v and Il.h., viz. 
 
 (5). — General remarks. — Tension chord pins are most severely strain- 
 ed when the live load covers the whole of the bridge. 
 
 The advantages of pin-connected structures are facility of erection 
 and transport, and the interchangeability of many of the parts. On the 
 other hand, pins are often badly designed, the effective strength of a bar 
 with hinged ends as a strut is considerably less than if the ends were 
 securely fixed, and the hammering under a live load causes the eyes to 
 elongate and i\vi pins to work loose. 
 
 A properly riveted bridge is certainly far more rigid than one con- 
 Btructed on the pin system. 
 
Rm:TS. 
 
 129 
 
 to 
 
 (6). — Rivets. — A rivet is an iron or steel shank, slightly tapered at 
 one end (the tail) and surmounted at the other by a cup or p<in-shaj)(d 
 head (Fig. 10). It is used to join steel or iron plates, bars, etc. For 
 this purpose the rivet is generally heated to a cherry red. the shank or 
 spindle, is passed through the hole prepared for it. and the tail is made 
 into a hut ton, or point. The hollow cuji-tool gives to the point a nearly 
 heniispherieal shape, and forms what is called a smiji-riret. (Fig. 2). 
 Snap-rivets, partly for the sake of appearance, are commonly used in 
 girder-work, but they are not so tight as con lca^pointed rivets {staff- 
 rivet^). wliieh are hammered into shape until almost cold, (Fig H). 
 
 When a sunMith .-iirfaee is required, the rivets are counter-sunk 
 (Fig. 4). The C(»unter-sinkirig is drilled and may extend throiujh the 
 plate, or a shoulder may be left at the inner edge. 
 
 Cold riveting is adopU^d for the small rivets in boilor work and also 
 wherever heating is imprac'ticable. but tightly-driven turned bolts are 
 sometimes substituU^l fur the rivets. In all sueh eases the material of 
 the rivets, or bolts, should be superior in (juality. 
 
 Loose rivets are easily discovered by tapping, and, if very loose, should 
 be at once replaced. It must be borne in mind, however, that expan 
 sions and contractions of a complicated character invariably accompany 
 hot-riveting, and it cannot be supposed that the rivets will be perfcftly 
 tight. Indeed, it is extremely doubtful whether a rivet has any hold 
 in a straight drilled hole, except at the ends. 
 
 Riveting is accomplished either by hand or machine, the latter being 
 far the more eflfective. A machine will squeeze a rivet, at almo.st any 
 t>'mperature, into a most irregular hole, but the exigencies of practical 
 conditions often prevent its use, except for ordinary work, and its advan- 
 tages cannot be obtained where they would be most appreciated as, 
 e.g., in the riveting up oi' connexions. 
 
130 
 
 STRENGTH OF PUNCHED OR DRILLED PLATER. 
 
 (7.) — Dlinrnslnns of rivets — The diam(-ter {d) of a rivet in ordinary 
 girder-work varies from ^-in, to 1-inch, and rarely exceeds l^in. 
 
 The thickness (t) of a plate in ordinary girder-work should never be 
 
 5 
 
 less than i-in., and a thickness of fin., or even -r-;-in., is preferable. 
 
 lb 
 
 Let T be the total thickness through which a rivet passes. 
 
 According to Fairbairn, when t < ^-in., d should be about 2.t 
 " " •' " < > i-in. " " " \\.t 
 
 ** '' Unwin, when t varies from ---in. to 1-in. and passes 
 
 through two thicknesses of plate, d lies 
 
 V . 3,5 ,7,8 
 
 between -t + 7-7 and 7:-t + ~. 
 •i lb 8 8 
 
 T 5 
 
 " " " when the rivets join several plates, <Z= • -f- — 
 
 u 
 <( 
 (I 
 
 " French practice, diar. of he;\d = l^-'A 
 
 '• " " length of rivet from head=r+l§.(^ 
 
 '• Rankine, lenijth of rivet from head = T+2.}f.d 
 
 The rise of the head —d 
 
 •J 
 
 The diar. of the rivet hole is made larger than that of the shank by 
 
 from .-7-;in. to -^-.in., so as to allow for the expansion of the latter when 
 32 8 
 
 hot. 
 
 There seems to be no objection to the use of long rivets, provided they 
 are properly heated and secured. 
 
 (8). — Strength of Punched and Drilled Plates. — Generally speaking 
 experiments indicate that the tenacity of iron and steel plates is con- 
 siderably diminished by punchuuj and that the effect of drilling is 
 similar, though less in degree. It would seem as if the deterioration in 
 tenacity is due, not to the cracking caused by the punch, nor to any 
 reduetinn (if tenacity in the neighbourhood of the hole, b)it rather to an 
 alteration in the elasticity which destroys the power of elongation in a 
 narrow annulus around the liole. The removal of the annulus (about 
 
 — in. thick^ neutralizes the effect of punching, and the plan is therefore 
 
 sometimes adopted of punching the holes -.in. less in diar. than the riv- 
 ets, the holes being subsequently enlarged and counter-sunk. 
 
 
RIVETED JOINTS. 
 
 131 
 
 oil- 
 is 
 in 
 
 my 
 an 
 
 n a 
 
 out 
 
 ore 
 
 nv- 
 
 Punching docs not sensibly aflFect the 8trenf!;th of Landore unannealed 
 plates, and only slightly diminishes the strength of thin steel plates, but 
 causes a considerable loss of tenacity in thick steel plates ; the loss, how- 
 ever, is less than for iron plates. 
 
 The harder the material the greater is the loss of tenacity. 
 
 Iron seems to suffer more from punching when the holes are near the 
 edge than when removed to some distance from it, while mild steel suffers 
 less when the hole is one diar. from the edge than when it is so far that 
 there is no bulging at the edge. 
 
 All experiments go to prove that the original strength of a punched 
 plate may be restored by annealing. 
 
 Whenever the metal is of an inferior quality, the holes should be 
 drilled. J^rilling is a necessity for first-class work when the diar. of the 
 holes is less than the thickness of ihe plate and also when several plates 
 are piled. It is impossible to punch plates, bars, angles, etc., in spite 
 of all expedients, in such a manner that the holes in any two exactly 
 correspond, and the irregularity bec^.ues intensified in a pile, the pass- 
 age of the rivet often being completely blocked. Recourse is then had 
 to the barbarous drift, or rimrr, which is driven through the hole by 
 main force, cracking and bending the plates in its passage, and separa- 
 ting them one from another, (Fig. 5). 
 
 The holes may be punched for ordinary work, and in plates of which 
 the thickness is less than the diar. of the rivets. 
 
 If the punch is helical or spiral inform the injury to the plate is less, 
 and may be diminished still more by giving the hole in the die-block a 
 diar. greater than that of the punch. 
 
 Hence, the loss of tenacity in punched plates depends upon : — 
 
 (l).-The character of the material operated upon. 
 
 (2).-The amount of the metal between the holes, or, probably, the 
 ratio of the diar. of the punch to tlie pitch or the punched holes. 
 
 (3). -The diar, of the punch, or, probably, the ratio of the diar, of the 
 punch to the thickness of the; plate, 
 
 (4:).-The ratio of the diar. of the punched hole to the diar. of the 
 hole in the die-block. 
 
 (9). — Riveted Joints. — Riveted joints may be classified as Lup, 
 Fish, and Butt ynntfi. 
 
 In Lap joints, the plates over-lap, (Figs. 15 and 18), and are riveted 
 together by one or more rows of rivets. 
 
132 
 
 STRENGTH OF RIVETED JOINTS. 
 
 
 [3^ 
 
 mmm^W 
 
 
 PI 
 
 I 
 
 tesuKMme^A 
 
 ^^^^■^H 
 
 ^s^ 
 
 FiS 
 
 16 
 
 Pig. 16 
 
 r 
 
 Fig. 17 
 
 
 Fic.18 
 
 
 In Fi&\i joints, the ends of the plates meet, and the plates are riveted 
 tea 8injj;le, (Fig. 16), or to two, (Fij^. 17), covers by means of one or 
 more mws of rivets on each side of the joint. 
 
 A Fish joint is termed a Rntt joint when the plates are in compres- 
 sion. The plates should butt evenly against one another, althougli they 
 seldom do ^!0 in practice. Indeed, the mere process of riveting draws 
 the plates slightly apart, leaving a gap which is often concealed by caulk- 
 ing. A much better method is to fill up the space with some such liard 
 Bub-tance as cast-zinc, but the best method, if the work will allow of the 
 increased cost, is to form a jump joint ^ i.e., to plane the eyes of the 
 platiis carefully, and then bring them into close comtact, when a short 
 cover with one or two rows of rivets will suffice to hold them in position. 
 
 The riveting is said to be single, ibnihle, triple , according as 
 
 the joint is secured by one, two, three, , rows of rivets. 
 
 Double, triple, , riveting may be chain, (Fig. 19), or zig-zag, 
 
 (Fig. 20). In the former case the rivets form straight lines longitu- 
 dinally and transversely, while in the latter the rivets in each row 
 divide the space between the rivets in adjacent rows. 
 
 (10). — Strength of riveted joints. — The strength of a joint, as derived 
 from the rivets alone, evidently depends upon the number of shears to 
 which they are liable. Thus, a rivet in double shear, (Figs. 17 and 
 18), is twice as strong as a rivet ia single shear, (Figs. 15 and 16). 
 
 According to Fairbairn, if the strength of an unpunched plate be 
 taken at 100, the comparative strength of single and double riveted 
 joints are as 56 and 70, respectively, but this estimate is probably too 
 high. At least it does not seem to be founded upon a satisfactory basis, 
 
STRENGTH OF RIVETED JOINTS. 
 
 133 
 
 nor to give satisfactory results, for the ratio of the tensile to tlie shear- 
 ing stress, as deduced from Fairbairn's experiments, varies with different 
 thicknesses of plates, which appears to be contrary to reason. 
 
 Fairbairn proposed to make the joint and unpuncheJ plate equally 
 strong, by increasing the thickness of the punched portion of the plate, 
 but it is difficult to carry this out in practice. 
 
 Very few, if any, trustworthy data have been supplied respecting the 
 resistance of plates to indentation by rivets >r bolts. The resistance 
 must of course vary with the quality of the iron or steel, but the degree 
 in which the tenacity of the plat«'s is affected by the indentation is most 
 uncertain. The mean crushing intrnsiti/ may be defined to be the ratio 
 of the total stress to the bearing area (the j)roduct of the diar. of the 
 hole by tht- thicftness nf the plate), and has been fixed at 5 tons per 
 stj. in. for icrought-iron, but on theoretical rather than practical grounds. 
 If it is also assumed that the bearing and tearing strengths of a joint are 
 the same, it is found that the crushing pressure rapidly increases with 
 the ratio of the diar. of the rivet to the thickness of the plate. When 
 the ratio exceeds 3, the crushing pressure in a double-cover joint is more 
 than 40,000-lbs. per sq. in., i.e., it has reached its ultimate limit, and the 
 joint will fail, although the tension in the plate is less than SGOO-lbs. per 
 .sq. in. Hence, the diar. of the rivet should not be greater than three 
 times the thickness of the plat«. In all probability the failure of the 
 joint at such a low tensile stress is partly due to the deformation of the 
 metal around the hole, which causes an unequal distribution of stress. 
 
 Until further experiments give more definite information, the safe 
 bearing intensity for wrought iron may be taken at 5-tons per sq. in. in 
 ordinary work, and at 7^-tons per sq. in. in chain rivetted joints with 
 well supportt>d rivets. The safe bearing intensity for steel may be taken 
 at the same proportion of the ultimate stress as in the case of wrought- 
 iron. 
 
 Let S be the total stresses at a riveted joint. 
 
 " /I'/s'./'a-/*! be the safe tensile, shearing, compressive, and bear- 
 ing unit stresses, respectively. 
 
 " t be the thickness of a plate, and w its width. 
 
 " A' be the total number of rivets on one side of a joint. 
 
 " n '' '' in one row. 
 
 " p be the pitch of the rivets i.e., t!\e distance centre to centre. 
 
 " (/ be the diar. of the rivets. 
 
 " X be the distance between the centre line of the nearest row of 
 rivets and the edge of the plate. 
 
134 
 
 STRENGTH OF RIVETED JOINTS. 
 
 It is impossible to apply the ordinary mathemafical rules to the 
 determination of the ultimate .<trengthof a riveted joint, as the distribu- 
 tion of the stress which produces rupture may prove to be very 
 irregular. 
 
 This irregularity may rise, (1). -Because the stress does not coin- 
 cide in direction with the centre line, (2) -Because of local action, 
 (3).-Because of the existence of t^traius within the metal before 
 punching. 
 
 The joint may fail in any one of the following ways : — 
 
 (1). — The riveta may shear. 
 
 (2). — The rivets may be forced into and crush the plate. 
 
 (3). — Tlie rivets may be torn out of the plate. 
 
 (4). — The plate may tear in a direction transverse to that of the 
 stress. 
 
 The resistance to rupture should be the same in each of the four 
 cases, and always as great as possible. 
 
 Vulw of X. -It has been found that the minimum safe value of x is 
 
 d, and this in most eases gives a sufficient overlap (=:2..c), while 
 
 3 
 x=--d is a maximum limit which amply provides for the bending and 
 
 u 
 
 shearing to which the joint may be subjected. Thus the overlap will 
 vary from l.d to 3.(^. 
 
 X may be supposed to consist of a length x,, to resist the shearing 
 action, and a length x, to resist the bending action. It is impossible to 
 determine theoretically the exact value of x-.^, as the straining at the 
 joint is very complex, but the metal in front of each rivet (the rivets at 
 the ends of the joint excepted) may be likened to a uniformly loaded 
 
 beam of length c?, depth x^ - -.~, and breadth <, with both ends^et/. Its 
 
 moment of resistance is therefore ^-.^ (x-i — o) , /being the max. unit 
 
 stress due to the bending. Also, if P is the load upon the rivet, the 
 
 . P 
 mean of the bonding moments at the end and centre is -d. 
 
 Hence, ajiproxini'iteli/, —a = - •^ ( x, - - j 
 
 -, 4/.</ </\^ 
 
 It will be assumed that the shearing strength of a rivet is equal to the 
 strength of a beam to resist cross-breaking. 
 
STRENGTH OF KIVETEI) JOINTS. 
 
 135 
 
 -J\ = {p-d).t.f,= d.t.J\ 
 
 (11). — Singlc-ruettd lap and single cover Joints {Figs. 15 invl Ul) 
 
 (1) 
 
 2..,.,/,=-^,/,, 
 
 ■K < 
 
 /« 
 
 3 (/ 
 
 
 (12). — Single-riveted dt)ubic cover Joints, (Fig. 17). 
 
 ■A=(p-d).t./,.^d.t./, 
 
 TT d^ 
 
 2..r,.^/,=2. --—/„ 
 
 .T,= — 
 
 d^ 
 
 (4) 
 (5) 
 
 (<5) 
 
 3 ./ v^'-ii^-r 4-/'' •••'■'^^n- v:;-!.^ 
 
 Ar„^^.__The joiiits in § (llj are weakened by the bending action, 
 possibly also by the concentration of the stress towards the inner faces of 
 the ^''ates, and oxperinjtiit shows that they are not nearly so strong as 
 the joints in i^( 12 ) of the same theoretic strength. The second cover in 
 the latter must necessarily diminish the effect of the bending and pre- 
 Bcrvo a more uniform distribution of stresa. In all probability, the 
 equality is restored by riveting a stiffeuer (e.g., an angle-iron) to the 
 plates in the lap or single cover joint, and in any case the difference will 
 wholly disappear if the joint is double riveted. 
 
 Again, equations (1) and (4) shew that the bearing unit-stress is 
 twice as great in the joints of § (12) as in the joints of ^ (U), so that 
 rivets of a larger diar. may be employed in the latter than is possible in 
 
 the former, for corresponding values of — •• 
 
 (13). — Chdin riveted Joints, (Fig. 19). 
 Mw-H.d).t = S=J\.N:d.t 
 
 ^ = ^'—r--fii when there is one cover only. 
 
 n.d^ 
 ^ = ^' -ij- -fi, when there are two covers. 
 
 (7) 
 (8) 
 
 (9) 
 This Class of joint is employed for the flanges of bridge girders, the 
 
 plates being piled as in Figs. 21, 22, 23, and n being usually 3, 4 oi .5. 
 In Fig. 22. the plates are grouped so as to break Joint, and opinions 
 
 differ as to whether this arrangement is superior to they«// butt shcwu 
 
136 
 
 ZIG-ZAG AND OTHER RIVETED JOINTS. 
 
 , _• », r\r\r\ r< r\ r\ /^,r^. ^ ^ . ' * 
 r • ■ ' f ' — ' ■ 1 J . « ■ 
 
 ^ ' : —^ . 
 
 . I, '' v^ v^t^ <^ VJ \J \^ wj ' I 
 
 J - I • , • ■ ' 
 
 <..".. • , Fig. 21 . r. 
 
 ^ r^ ^ ^ r^r-. O o r-i o' Oi O , ,r^ ^ r.. ^ ^ ■ ^ ^ ^ 
 
 C^ ' ' , =^\ n — ^ 
 
 Fig. 22 
 
 > 
 
 '' v-" v-f •-0 — — »=» — «=> — «::> — ^13 — iw)i ^_^ v.^ 1 
 
 FiG.23 
 
 in Fij;. 23. The advantiif^ea of the latter are that the plates may be 
 cut in uniform lengths, and the flanges built up with a degree of accuracy 
 which cannot be otherwise attained, while the short and awkward pieces 
 accompanying l/roken joints are dispensed with. 
 
 A good practical rule, and one saving much labour and expense, is 
 to make the lengths of the plates, bars, etc., multiples of the pitch, and 
 to design the covers, connectiona, etc., so as to interfere with the pitch 
 as little as possible. 
 
 The distance between two con.secutive joints of a group, (Fig. 22), is 
 generally made equal to twice the pitch. 
 
 (14). — Zig-zag and other riveted joints (Fig. 20), — 
 
 A few experiments indicate that chain is a little stronger than zig- 
 zng riveting. An excellent plan for lap and single cover joints is to 
 arrange the rivets as shewn in Figs. 24 to 28. In reality, the strength 
 
COVEHS. 
 
 137 
 
 , 13 
 
 ind 
 tch 
 
 is 
 
 '9- 
 to 
 
 th 
 
 nf the plate at the joint is (>iily Wfukonod by nnr rivet Imlc. fur the 
 pliii cannot tear at its weakest section, i.r., alonjr the central row of 
 rivets {ii<t). until the rivets between it and theedi^e are shorn in two. 
 
 Let there be in rows of rivets, 11, 22, HiJ (^^'J-'- 2G). 
 
 The total number of rivi'ts is evidentlv w". 
 
 Ii(t/,, 7„. 7„ y, bo the unit tensile stresses in the plate alon<' 
 
 the lines, 11, 22, 3'^, , respectively. 
 
 .-.S^ (u-->I).(j\~^'^.vi\/,, for the line 11 
 
 (H'-'J.l/)^7,= ^ .(m^-l).y'. '• " L'2 
 
 {w - 3d).tq, = .(/n» - :j ) /;. " •• 3.i 
 4 
 
 {w - 4.d).t.(j, = ^- .(m^ - t; )./;, •• 
 
 4-t 
 
 ur - 1 
 
 Assume that /,=7„ .-. »•=(?«'+ 1).^/. 
 
 Hence, by substituting this value of w in the first of the above 
 
 I *• ^^ '^ /i • 
 relations, ^ =j-.'--- since q,^,q^, are each less than /„ so that the as- 
 
 sumption is justifiable. 
 
 (1.5). — Covers. — In tension joints the strength of the covers must not 
 be less than that of the plates to be united. Henco, a single cover should 
 be at loa.st as thick as a single plate, and if there are two covers, each 
 should be at least half as thick. 
 
 When two covers are used in a tension pile it often happens that a joint 
 occurs in the top or bottom plate, .so that the greater portion of the stress 
 in that plate may have to be borne by the nearest cover. It is. tluTcfore, 
 considered advi.^^able to make its thickness |-ths. that of the plate. 
 
 The .lumber of the joints should be reduced to a minimum, as the 
 introduction of covers adds a large percentage to the dead weight of 
 the pile. 
 
 Covers might be wholly dispen.sed with in per/ret y«w/* joints, and a 
 great ecommiy of material effected, if the difficulty of forming such joints 
 and the increased cost did not render them impracticable. Hence, it 
 may be said that covers are required for all eomprrssion joints, and that 
 they must be as strong as the plates, for, unless the plates butt closely, 
 the whole of the thrust will be transmitted through the covers. In some 
 
138 
 
 KIVET CONNEXION 15KTWKKN FLANOKS AND WEFl. 
 
 of the best exiiniploH of bridyc construction, the tension and couipnssion 
 joints are i(k'ntical. 
 
 (IG). — liio(t ('i)nnexion hvtween Jl(ni(j< s and web. 
 
 The web ia usually riveted to the angle-irons which form part of the 
 fla" « 
 
 .1/ be the bending niomont. and .S' the shearing force, at the jioint 
 of >vnicli tlie abscissa is x, x being measured along the girder from any 
 given origin. 
 
 Let /( be the deptli of the girder, 
 
 liCt/; be the safe shearing stress per unit of area. 
 
 Two cases may be considered. 
 
 Otisc I.-l'i'(te \Vt;h. — The shearing area of the rivets connecting the 
 ■web with tlie angles must be e({ual to the theoretic horizontal section of 
 
 the web, i.r., to .y, and the corresponding number of rivets per unit 
 Jl-d[_ 11 nJ'/^ 
 
 1^ .'be the liorizontiil stress transmitted to the angles through the 
 web, and tending to make them sUde over the flange face. 
 
 ,'.F.h, the increment of the bending moment, = -^ = S,ot F=—. 
 
 dx 
 
 n 
 
 s 
 
 The requisite shearing area = -r-.- and number of rivets is therefore 
 
 the same as before. 
 
 Cuse II -Open M'eh. — One of the 
 braces which meet at each apex is a 
 strut, and the other a tie. 
 
 The sectional area of the rivets con- 
 necting each brace with the an<rle-irt>n 
 must be ecjual to the net section of 
 that brace. 
 
 Let /' be the horizontal component 
 of the diagonal stresses. 
 
 .•. F.h the increment of Uie bending moment, = aS' 
 
 .". F =-j-, is the force which tends to make the angle slide over the 
 
 flange face. 
 
 Hence, the number of rivets between two consecutive apices. 
 
 _ 14 1 S 
 
 
EXAMPLES. 
 
 139 
 
 iton 
 
 the 
 
 lint 
 
 my 
 
 ihe 
 
 (.f 
 
 lit 
 
 he 
 
 re 
 
 le 
 
 Examples 
 
 (1)- — A trellis girder rests on two supports without exorting any 
 lateral pressure upon them. A vertical section of the girder uieet^ two 
 sets of H bars inclined in opposite directions, and it is assumed that in 
 each set a mean stress maybe substituted for the different stresses in the 
 bars. If />,/>', are the mean stresses and 7'C, the horizontal forces in 
 the flanges at the section, shew that «.(/)- D') sin 0+ T- C must be 
 zero at all points of the span, independently of any additional hypothesis, 
 being the common inclination of the bars to the vertical. 
 
 Note. — If T = C, D must necessarily be equal to D'. 
 
 (2). — The tensile and compressive unit stresses in the chords of a bridge- 
 truss of span I and uniform depth (/, are nowhere to exceed /', and/j, 
 respectively ; shew that the greatest central deflection is approximately 
 
 (/i+/2)- g ^, , • Hence, if the sp:in is eight times the depth, and if 
 
 the grade line is to be truly horizontal when the bridge is loaded, shew 
 that the length of the top chord should exceed that of the bottom chord 
 by an amount etjual to the camber. 
 
 (H) — A lattice girder 200-ft. long and 20-ft. deep, with two systems 
 of right-angled triangles, carries a dead load of 800-lbs. per lineal ft. ; 
 determine the greatest stresses in the diagonals of the fourth bay from 
 one end, when a live load of 12()0-lbs. per lineal ft. passes over the 
 girder. 
 
 (4). — A lattice girder 80-ft. long and 8-ft. deep carries a uniformly 
 distributed load of U-ijOOO-lbs. ; find the flange inch-stresses at the 
 centre, the sectional area of the top flange being SG^sq. ins. gross, and 
 of the bottom flange 45-sq. ins. net. 
 
 What should be the camber of the girder, and what extra length 
 should be given to the top flange, so that the bottom flange of the loaded 
 girder may be truly horizontal ? 
 
 (5). — A lattice girder 80-ft. long, and 10-ft. deep, with four systems 
 of right-angled triangles carries a dead load of 1000 lbs. per lineal it. ; 
 determine the greatest stresses in the diagonals met by a vertical plane 
 ju the seventh bay from one end, when a live load of 2500-lbs. per lineal 
 ft. passes over the girder. Design the flanges, which are to consist of 
 plates riveted together. 
 
140 
 
 EXAMPLIS. 
 
 The lattice bars are riveted to angle irons ; find the number of ^ -in. 
 
 o 
 
 rivets required to connect the angle-irons with the flanges in the first 
 bay, 10,000 lbs. per sq. in. being the safe shearing strength of the 
 rivets. 
 
 (6). — The bracing of a lattice girder consists of a single system of 
 triangles in which one of the sides is a strut and the other a tie inclined 
 to the horizontal at angles of a and ^, respectively ; in order to give the 
 strut sufficient rigidity its section is made /;-times that indicated by 
 theory, t e co-efficient /•; being > unity ; shew that the amount of material 
 
 in the struts and ties is a minimum when - — = «. 
 
 (6). — A bridge of n equal spans crosses a space of 7/-ft. ; w ^ and w, 
 are respectively the live load and weight of the platform, permanent 
 wry, etc., in tons per lineal ft.; shew that the weight ?" , of the main 
 girders in tons per lineal ft. may be suppressed in the form 
 
 L. Wj. {p. k 4- r) -f- w^.n 
 n - L. (p-fc + q) 
 k being the ratio of the span to the depth, and p, q, r, numerical co- 
 efficients. Hence, determine the limiting span of a girder. 
 
 If X is the cost of each pier, Y the cost per ton of the superstruc- 
 ture, determine the value of ?i which will make the total coat per lineal 
 
 ft., i.e.,- ■■{■w[.Y, a minimum, and prove that this is approxi- 
 
 mately the case where the spans are so arranged that the cost of a span is 
 equal to that of a pier. 
 
 (8). — A warren girder with its bracing l 
 formed of nine equilateral triangles, and 
 with every joint loaded, is 90-ft. long; its 
 dead weigl' 5001bs. per lineal ft.; prepare 
 a table shewing the maximum stress in each bar and bay when a live- 
 load of 1350-lbs.per lineal ft. crosses the girder, allowing for an engine- 
 excess of 4,(l001bs. per panel, extending over two consecutive panels. 
 The diagonals and verticals are riveted to angle-iront forming part of 
 the flanges ; how many f in rivets are required for the connection of AB, 
 AC, and AD, at A ? Also, how many are required between A and E to 
 resist the tendency of the angle-irons to slip longitudinally ? 
 
EXAMPLES. 
 
 141 
 
 (9). — If a force of SOOOlbs. strike the bottom chord of the <:irdor in 
 the prccedinfr quoi^tion at 20-ft. from one ' nd, and in a direction inclined 
 at 30° to the horizontal, determine its effect upon the several members. 
 
 (10.) — The platform of asinirle-track 
 bridtre is supported upon the top chord> 
 of two warren girders ; each girder i.^ 
 100-ft. loni.', and its bracing is formed of tin L'cjuilateral triangles; the 
 dead weight of the bridge is 900-lbs. per lineal ft.; the greatest total 
 stress in A A when a train crosses the bridge is 41,;-{94.8-lbs.; determine 
 the weight of the live load per lineal ft. Prepare a table shewing the 
 greatest stress in each bar and bay when a single load of 15,000-lbs. 
 crosses the girder. 
 
 (11). — The compression and tension bars in certain two bays of a 
 lattice girder are required to bear stresses of 90-cwts. and 130-cwts 
 respectively ; design the bars and specify the size and number of the 
 rivets at the attachments, allowing 100-ewts. per sq. in. of net section 
 in tension, 65-cwts. per sq. in. of gross section in compression, and a 
 sliearing stress on the rivets of 100-cwts. per sq. in. 
 
 (12).-The two trusses for a 16-ft. road- 
 way are each 100-ft. in the clear, 17-ft. 3-in. 
 deep, and of the type represented in the 
 Fig.; under a live load of 1120-lbs. per 
 lineal ft. the greatest total stress in Ali is 35,400-lbs., det<;rmine the 
 permanent load. 
 
 The diagonals and verticals are riveted to angle-irons forming part 
 of the flanges ; how many |-in. rivets are required for the connection 
 of AB and BC at B ? also, how many are required between B and D to 
 resist the tendency of the angle-irons to slip longitudinally? 
 
 (13). — Design a double flanged plate girder, 8-ft. deep and 80-ft. 
 long, to carry per lineal ft. a dead load of 500-lbs. and a live load of 
 1600-lbs., the safe tensile and compressive iuch-stress being 10,000-lb8. 
 and 8,000-lbs., respectively. 
 
 Determine the number of rivets required per lineal unit of length at 
 the end and centre of the girder to coanect the flange angle-irons with 
 the web. 
 
 (14). — Find the points in each chord of the girder in the preceding 
 questioa at which the chord stress is equal to the vertical shearing 
 stress. 
 
142 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 (15). — A Howe truss, 80-ft. long and 8-ft. deep, has a single set of 
 diagonals at 45"; find the chord and diagonal stresses in the ^rd hay : 
 (a)-Whcn the truss carries a uniformly distributed load of 40-tons, (b)- 
 Wheo the 40-tons are concentrated at the middle of the span. (^Neglect 
 the weight of the truss). 
 
 (16). — Design a 16-panelled Howe truss for a clear span of 200-ft., 
 and of such a depth that '.,he chord stress in the 8th and 9th panels is 
 one-half of the total distributed load (dead load per lineal ft.=:800-lbs. 
 live load per lineal ft. = 1200-ibs.). 
 
 (17). — What should be the depth of the truss in the preceding ques- 
 tion 30 that the chord and diagonal stresses in the second panel may be 
 ecjual ? 
 
 (18). — A Howe truss with A^-panels and a span of ?ft. is designed for 
 a dead load of ?{'-lbs. and a live load of i«'-lbs. at each of the panel points 
 in the bottom chord ; assuming that the sectional nreas of the diflferent 
 members are directly proportional to the stresses to which they are sub- 
 jected, determine the depth of truss which will secure the greatest 
 economy of material, 
 
 (19). — The platform of a double-track 
 railway bridge at Thamesville is supported 
 from the bottom chords of two trusses bracid 
 and counter-braced as in the Fig. The leng<'. of each truss is 184-ft. 
 2-in.. its depth is 34-ft., and it is designed to carry per lineal ft. a live 
 load of 2250-lb3. and a dead load of 1 1 00-lbs. ; prepare a table shewino- 
 the max, stress in each member. 
 
 (20).— Design a cross-tie for the bridge in the presiding question, 
 the live load for the floor-system being 800il-lbs. per lineal ft. 
 
 (21).— A 16-panelled Muiphy-Whipple truss 200ft. long, and 18-ft. 
 9-ins. deep, is designed to carry per lineal ft. a dead load of 750-lbs. and 
 a live load of 1200-lbs., the panel excess weight due to the engine being 
 4000-lbs., and that due to the tender 3000-lbs. ; prepare a table shewin*'- 
 the max. stress in each member, and specify the bars which require to 
 be counter-braced. 
 
 (22). — Determine the greater weiglit that may be constructed at 50- 
 ft. from one end of the truss iu the preceding question. 
 
 (23). — Design a quadrangular truss (See ^^^^ 
 
 Fig.) with square panels for a span of 91-ft., ^^^SlMMMMS 
 the chords and posts being of timber and the 
 ties of wrouKht-iron. 
 
EXAMI'LK-!. 
 
 143 
 
 (24). — Design a Fink truss for a 242-ft. span from the followini^ 
 data : — dopth of truss = 30-ft. ; kntrth of panel = lo-ft H ins. ; dead 
 load per lineal ft. of truss = 1282 lbs. live load per lineal ft. of truss 
 = 1300-lbs. ; the en_i:;ine excess ■weij:^ht upon each of the end posts = 
 17U4-lbs. 
 
 (25). — A^, A.,, and a,, a.^, are respectively the sectional areas and 
 inclinations to the vertical of the two ties which meet at tlie foot of a 
 post in a Bolhnan truss; if the sectional area of each tie is proportioned 
 to the stress to which it is subjected, shew that 
 
 >1,. cos'n.siti a = A .i.cos^aj.sin n^. 
 
 (26). — Design an cight-panolled Bolhnan truss. 100-ft. long and 12iV- 
 ft. deep, to carry a uniformly distributed load of 200-tons, together with 
 a single load of 10-tons concentrated at 25-ft. from one end. 
 
 (27). — In a Post truss for a 200-ft. span there are IH-panels, the posts 
 incline towards the centre, and have a run of half a bay, the ties cross 
 two panels, and are inclined at 45" to the vertical, the counter-ties cross 
 one panel, and have the same inclination, the panel weight of engine = 
 17,600-lbs., of tender = 16,16(1 lbs., end of cars = 12,500-lbs.; the maxi- 
 mum stress in the seventh tie from one end = 56,000-lbs.; determine 
 the panel weight of truss, and specify the bars which require V, be 
 counter-braced. 
 
 (28). — A weight is placed at the centre of a truss of which the web 
 consists of a single system of struts and ties; shew how to de.Vrmine 
 the inclination of the web members to the vertical, so that the amount of 
 material in them may be a minimum. 
 
 (20). — Design a bowstring girder, (^^;)-with vertical posts and diagon- 
 al bracing, (6)-with isosceles bracing, from the following data: — 
 The span is 80-ft., the depth at the centre is 10 ft., the dead load per ft. 
 run is ^-ton, the live load per ft. run is 1-ton. 
 
 (80). — The bowstring girder repre- 
 sented by the Fig. is designed to sup- 
 port a load of 840-lbs. per ft. run ; its 
 span is 100-ft., its central depth 14-ft., 
 its depth at each end 5-ft., and its 
 upper chord is a circular arc ; determine the stresses in all the members. 
 
 (31). — The span of a suspension bridge is 200-ft.. the dip of the chains 
 is 80-ft., and the weight of the roadway is 1-ton per ft. run ; find the 
 tensions at the middle and ends of each chain. 
 
144 
 
 EXAMI'LES. 
 
 (Ii2). — Assuinin<r ' .vt a rope (or sitiirlo wirt;) will safely bear a tiMi- 
 sioii of ir)-ton.s per sij. in., show that it will safoly b.'ar its own weight 
 over a span of about one uiile. the dip being j'^-th of the span. 
 
 (;{;}). — Siiew that a steel wire rope of the best (|Uality. with a dip nf 
 ■|-th of the span, will not break until the span execds 7 miles. 
 
 (34). — The platform of a suspension bridgt.' of 150-ft. span is sus- 
 pended by 90 vertical rods (45 on each side) from the cables, which 
 have a dip of 15 ft. ; the weight of the platform is 224(J-lbs. per lineal 
 ft. ; find the stresses at the middle and ends of the cables, and in the 
 suspenders, when a uniformly distributed load of 78. 750-lbs. covers half 
 the bridge. 
 
 (35). — Design a pair of auxiliary girders for the bridge in the pre- 
 ceding (juestion, to counteract the effect of a live load of l()50-lbs. per 
 lineal ft., and examine the effect of hinging the girders at the centre. 
 
 (3G). — Abridge 4-t2-ft. long consists of a central span of 180-ft. and 
 two side spans each of 131-ft. ; each side of the platform is suspended by 
 vertical rods from two iron wire cables ; each pair of cables passes over 
 two ma.sonry abutments and two piers, the former being 24 ft. and the 
 latter 40-ft. above the surface of the ground ; the lowest point of the 
 cables in each spaa is 19-ft. above the ground surface ; at the abut- 
 ments the cables are conuectt^d with straight wrought-iron chains, by 
 means of which they are attached to anchorages at a horizontal dis- 
 tance of GG-ft. from the foot of each abutment ; the dead weight of the 
 bridge is 3500-lbs per lineal ft., and the bridge is covered with a proof 
 load of 4500-lbs. per lineal ft. ; determine, 
 
 Qi). — The stresses in the cables at the points of support and at the 
 centre of each span. 
 
 (/>). — The dimensions and weight of the cables, (1) — if of uniform 
 section throughout, (2) — if each section is proportioned to the pull 
 across it. 
 
 (c). — The alteration in the length of the cables and the corresponding 
 depression of the platform at the centre of each span, due (1) — to a 
 change of G0° F. from the mean temperature, (2) — to the proof load. 
 
 (rf). — The crushing and bending efforts at the f«ot of a pier. 
 
 (<'). — The bearing area at the top of the abutments, and the mass of 
 masonry necessary to resist the tendency to overturning and to hori- 
 zontal displacement. {Weight of masonry per cubic ft. — Vl'A lbs., Its 
 safe comjjressive strength per sq.ft.~2ii^-lbs., its cuejficient uf friction 
 = .76). 
 
EXAMPLES. 
 
 145 
 
 the 
 
 as of 
 lori- 
 Its 
 •tiun 
 
 (37). — Solve the preceding question when the cahlcs for the several 
 spans are independent, and have tlieir ends securely attached to the 
 points of support. The piers are wrouirht-iron oscill'.lng columns, and 
 in order to maintain the equilibrium of the structure under an unequally 
 distributed loads the heads of the columns are connected with each 
 other and with the abutments by iron wire stays ; determine the proper 
 dimensions of the stays, assuming then to be approximately straiglit. 
 
 (38). — The river span of a suspension bridge is 930-ft., and weigh.s 
 5976-tons, of which 1430-tons are borne by stays radiating from the 
 summit of each pier, while the remaining weight is distributed between 
 /our 15-in. steel wire cables producing in each at the piers a tension of 
 20G4-tons ; find the dip of the cables. 
 
 The estimated maximum traffic upon the river span is 1311-tons, 
 uniformly distributed ; determine the increased stress in the cables. 
 
 To what extent might the traffic be safely increased, the limit of 
 elasticity of a cable being 8116-tons, and its breaking stress 1^3,300- 
 tons? 
 
 (39).— A semi-circular rib, pivoted at the crown and springings, is 
 loaded uniformly per horizontal unit of length ; determine the position 
 and magnitude of the maximum bending moments, and shew that the 
 horizontal thrust on the rib is one-fourth of the total load. 
 
 (40). — Draw the equilibrium polygon for an arch of 100-ft. span and 
 20 ft. rise, when loaded with weights of 3, 2, 4, and 2 tons respectively, 
 at the end of the 3rd, 6th, 8th, and 9th division from the left support, 
 often e(|ual horizontal divisions. (Xeijlect the weight of the rib). 
 
 If the rib consist of a web and of two flanges 2^ ft. from centre to 
 centre, determine the maximum flange stress. 
 
 (41), — A parabolic rib of span / and rise /.•, having its ends A and B 
 fixed, supports a given load at a liorizontal distance x from the middle 
 of the span ; the ecjuilibrium polygon consists of two straight lines CD 
 CE, meeting the verticals through .1 and li in D an E respectively ; 
 if ^•IZ>=//,, BE=ij.i, and if rj is the vertical distance of (J from AB 
 shew that, 
 
 2 /+10..V, 2 /-10.;i- ^^ 6 , 
 
 (42). — A parabolic double-flangod rib 2i-ft, deep, of 100-ft. span 
 and 20-ft. rise, is fixed at both ends and loaded in the same maimer as 
 the rib in Question 40 ; draw the equilibrium polygon, and det<!rmiuo 
 the flange stresses at the ends and at the division points. 
 
 10 
 
146 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 (48). — A ril) ill the form of tin- scixuii-nt of a cirelo. of sp;in I and 
 rise /,-, is hiiitri'tl at its oihIh AJi. and supports a W(.'i;:ht M' at a liori- 
 zojital (listanco .r from tho uiiddlo of the span: the t'(|uilibrium polygon 
 consists of two straight lines CA, CB, tho vertical distance of ^' from 
 AB beiiii: 1' ,• determine the value of 1', and sliew that the horizontal 
 
 thrust on the rib is ir.- 
 
 4. /. 1' 
 
 (44). — Xf a rib in the form of the seiiiiient of a circle be substituted 
 for the rib in Question (41), shew how to tind y.., y^, Y, and apply to 
 the case of semi-circular rib. 
 
 (45). — Draw the curve of o(iuilibrium for a semi-circular rib of uni- 
 form Mction under a load uniformly distributed per horizontal unit of 
 length, (") — when hinjred at tlie ends, (/>; — when hinged at the ends 
 and centre, (c) — when fixed at ihe ends. 
 
 (4(3). — Det^^-rmine the horizontal thru>t on a rib in tlie form of the 
 scirment of a circle due to change of t" from the mean temperature. 
 
 (47). — In CliMpfi-r X, determine the changes to be made in the 
 analysis, (a) — of JJ i;}.14, 15, when the e(|uations deduced in Corollary 4, 
 §(13), are employed instead of equations Id, 11 and 12. 
 
 (fj). — Of ^ 13 and 14, when the abutments yield to the thrust ^o as 
 to t'ohirge the sjian by an amount //.-//., // being a co-efficient to be 
 determined by experiment. 
 
 (r). — Of ^5 14 and 15, when the effect of a change of temperature is 
 to be taken into account. 
 
 (48). — Illustrate J^ 13, 14, 15, by the example of a rib in which 
 
 h = ~=i\S.z, and q =■-;• 
 h u 
 
 (49). — A wrought-irou parabolic rib, of 90-ft. span and 10-ft. rise, is 
 lunged at the two abutments ; it is of a double y-section, uniform 
 throughout, and 24-ins. deep from centre to centre of the flanges; deter- 
 mine the compression at the centre, and also the position and amount of 
 the maximum bending moment, {<() — when a load of 48-tons is concen- 
 trated at the centre, (/>). — when a load of 9G-tons is uniformly distributed 
 per horizontal unit of length. 
 
 IX'termine the deflection of the rib in each case. 
 
 (50). — In the framed arch repre- 
 sented by the Fig., the span is 120- 
 ft.. the ri.<e 12-ft., the depth of the 
 truss at the crowu 5-ft., the fixed load 
 
EX.\MPLES. 
 
 147 
 
 ibuted 
 
 at each top joint 10-totis, anrl the moving load 10-tons; doteruiino the 
 maximum stniss in oadi mrmbiT with any distriltiition of load. 
 
 Shew that, a))|iriiximati'ly. the amount oi' metal rc((uir(.'d for the arch : 
 the amount required for a bowstrinir lattice girder of the same s])an and 
 17-ft. deep at tlu! centre: the amount recjuired for a girder of the same 
 Fpan and 12-ft. deep ;: 100 ; If)') : 175. 
 
 (51). — Design an arched rib of 100-ft. span and 20-ft. rise, the fixed 
 load being 40 tons uniformly distributed per horizontal unit of length, 
 and the moving load 1-ton per horizontal ft. 
 
 (52). — A cast iron arch, (."^eeFig. ), who.'ie 
 cross-.HH'tiiMis are rectangular, and uni- 
 formly !^-ins. wide, has a straight horizontal 
 cxtrailos, and i.s hinged at the centre and at 
 the abutments. Calculati' the nm'mal intensity of stress at the top and 
 bottom edges d, E, of the vi'rtieal section, distant 5-ft. from the centre 
 of the si)an, due to a vertical load of 20-tons concentrated at a point 
 distant 5 ft. 4-ins., horizdutally from B ; also find the maximum intensity 
 of the shearing .stress on the same section, and .state the point at which 
 it occurs. (A15=: 21 ft. 4 ins.) 
 
 (5|}) The gket-ch .shews the 
 
 truss of a counterbalanced swing- 
 bridire. supposed to be wholly 
 supported by the turntable at A 
 and B ; the dead weight is ()50-lbs. per lineal ft. of the bridge, and the 
 couuterpoi.se consists of concrete hung in a box from the points c and 
 D ; ro(iuired the weight of the counterpoise a.ssuming, ///•.</, that it is all 
 carried on B, and, sirmid, that a portion of it is transmitted to A by 
 the dotted bar, so that the reaction at A may be e((ual to tliat at H. and 
 the whole wt>ight of the bridge be equally distributed over the turntable. 
 
 Shew how to find the stresses in the different members of the truss. 
 
 (54).— The truss for 
 a counterbalarced swing- 
 bridge is of the I'orm and 
 dimensions shewn by the 
 Fig., the counterpoise 
 consisting of concrete 
 hung in a box from the points c and D ; the dead weight is 050-lbs. 
 per lineal ft. of the bridge ; determine the stresses in the different mem- 
 
148 
 
 EXAMI'LES, 
 
 bern, (</). — when tlic bridge is opon iiiid is wholly supportrtl l)y tlu^ turn- 
 table at A and B, (h) — wlu-n the liridgt! is closed, and is subjected to 
 a passing load of 30(IO-lbs. per lineal ft. 
 
 Design tlie joint at E so that, however unecjually the arms may be 
 loadi'd, the whole of the load may be transmitted to the main posts EA 
 and EB and evenly distributed over the turntable. 
 
 (55). — A girder bridge of 100-ft. span deflects 3-ins. below the hori- 
 zontal line under a certain litad IT. at rest ; tind the increased pressure 
 due to centrifugal force if ITcros-ses the bridge at GU-miles an hour. 
 
 (5()). — A .stiffening girder for a suspension bridge has its ends fixed .so 
 as U) be incapable of vertienl motion. 
 
 If a load is concentrated at the centre of the girder, shew that th^ 
 ratio of tlie vertical distance between the highest and lowest points of the 
 central axis to the vertical distance between the end and lowest point 
 
 IS 
 
 9 
 
 If a uniformly distributed load covers /itv;7A('rc7s of the girder from 
 one end, shew that the ratio of the vertical distance between the ends 
 and the lowest point of the neutral axis to the vertical distance between 
 the ends and the highest point is 4. 
 
 Determine the depression of the lowest point below the highest when 
 one-third of the girder from one end is uniformly loaded. 
 
 (57). — The plate in Fig. is 7^-ins. wide 
 and ^-in. thick ; B and c are |-in. rivet holes ; 
 AB= IJ-ins. OF = 3-ins. ; find CE so that the 
 efficiency on the line abce may be equal to 
 that on the live ABD. 
 
 (58). — Determine the strength of a joint of 
 the type represeat<id by Fig. 28, Chap. VI., from the following data : — 
 
 widthofplate = 4 r--ius., thickness of plates= thickness of cover =— in., 
 16 2 
 
 13 . 7 
 
 diar. of rivets = -—-ins , pitch of rivets on line aa = 2— -^-ins., on line 
 
 BB=3J-ins., distance between aa and bb =l^-ius., between aa and 
 cc= 3|^-ins. 
 
 (59). — A ^-in. flat diagonal bar at an angle of 45° is riveted to a 
 i-in. vertical flange plate ; if the admissible stress per sq. in. on the 
 shearing area of rivet be 5-tons, and 7^ tons on the bearing area, shew 
 that the strength of the joint may be always made greater than that of 
 the bar with two rows of rivets. 
 
EXAMPLES. 
 
 UO 
 
 in. 
 
 (♦HO. — A riveted joint may fail l»y orushin<r, the bearinir area being 
 insufficient; assuming that tlie rivil and rivet hole retain tlieir cylin- 
 drieal forms when the joint is straini'd. and that the pressure at any 
 point of the hearing is normal to tlio surfaces in contact and eipial in 
 intensity to /. cos n., a being the angle between the normal and the 
 
 direction of the resultant stress, shew that -y, =-,-:• J' and / being re- 
 spectively the maximum and mean intensities of the crushing pressure in 
 the direction of the resultant stress. 
 
 ((51). — A chord-pin joint is of the type represented by Fig. 7, Chap. 
 VI. ; the eight bars are each S-ins. deep by 1-in. wide; tlie two inner- 
 most bars are 1-in. apart, and the spaces between the remaining bars 
 are closed up ; find the diar. of the pin, assuming that the ultimate unit 
 
 stress in a bar is -T--ths. of the actual stress in the pin at its cireum- 
 27 ' 
 
 ference. 
 
 (G2).-The curvature of a girder at a vertical section of depth h on 
 one side of a chord pin joint is increased '/-times by the deformation 
 of the web; r is the radius of gyration of the .section of the chord; if /' 
 be the coefficient of sliding friction, shew that the diameter of the pin 
 
 which will just prevent rotation is a[)proximately - . — 
 
 State the practical effi.'Ct of this result. 
 
 (G3).-Two 1^ ins. lateral rods are coupled on a piu ; the outer is 
 subjected to a .stress of 2^-tons and the lever arm of its longitudinal 
 component is H-ins., the inner is subjected to a stress of 9i-t(rtis and 
 the lever arm of its longitudinal component is 1-in.; the stressi's in the 
 web members produce a coujile having its axis inclined at 4^)" to the 
 vertical, and a moment of 20-inch tons; determine the proper diameter 
 of the pin, 
 
 (()4)-I)(if(t. — A deck bridge consists of two 
 independent spans of 200-ft., supported at one 
 end by an iron braced pier 50-ft. high. The 
 trusses ;ire 80-iY, centre to centre of chords ; 
 the distance between the centre lines of the 
 tru.s.scs is 17-ft. ; the planes of the pier faces 
 batter 2-ivis. in 1-ft.; a horizontal section of the 
 pier is square. The \vind pressure is 401bs. 
 per sq. ft.; 10-sq. ft. per lineal ft. of bridge 
 and lO-.sq. ft. per lineal ft. of train, are subject 
 to wind pressure; the dead load per lineal ft. is 
 
150 
 
 KX.VMl'LKS. 
 
 1000-lbs. and the 11\.> load 280()-lbs.; tlio uhsymod wiM^dit of the pior 
 is IHOO-llw. ])er ft. in heij:;ht; the cyliiidiT of tiw. locomotive is iniiis. 
 in diani., tlm pri'ssurt; on the piston is l;{()-lbs. per sc^ in.: — 
 
 (<i)- — Find tli(! stresses in the wind b''acini:. 
 
 {/)). — It a train of empty cars is on the l)rid;j;t^ and are on the point of 
 overturning, ascertain whether the inelined posts will be subjected to 
 tensile stn-sses. The cars weigh DOO-lbs. per lineal ft., and the centre 
 of priissure is 7-ft. above the rails. 
 
 (o). — Ascertain whether the wind pressure of 40-lbs. per s(|. ft. upon 
 the empty bridge will produce tension anywhere in the inclined posts, 
 the centre of pressure being li-ft. above the middle of the truss. 
 
 ('/). — A loaded train rests upon one span, the engine being directly 
 over the inclined ])osts ; find the stresses in the traction bracing when 
 the whole pressure oi'130-lb-. per .s(j. in. is suddenly applied upon the 
 piston. 
 
 (t). — A loaded train, 200-ft. in length, is running at a speed of 30 
 uiiles an hour. Sufficient power is applied to the car-brake to bring 
 the train to rest in 300-1't.; find the stresses in the traction bracing 
 when the engine is over a pair of inclined posts. 
 
 (/), — Find the max. stresses in inclined posts in each of the three 
 sections, by the method of moments, neglecting the effect of traction. 
 
 (r/). — Will the shoe at the foot of a post slide under any distribution 
 of il'o load ? (Cocff. of frictioa=/) 
 
I